ADDENDUM NO. ADD-1 Page 1 PINAL COUNTY ......1. DLR Group Project Number: 30-19101-00 2. Project...

ADDENDUM NO. ADD-1 PINAL COUNTY ATTORNEY’S OFFICE PINAL COUNTY FACILITIES MANAGEMENT PROJECT NO. 30-19101-00 FLORENCE, AZ ADDENDUM NO. ADD-4 DLR Group 6225 North 24th Street, Suite 250 TO THE Phoenix, AZ 85016 VOLUME 2 (602) 381-8580 PROJECT MANUAL AND DRAWINGS FOR November 6, 2019 PINAL COUNTY ATTORNEY’S OFFICE PROJECT NUMBER 53330084 FLORENCE, ARIZONA DLR GROUP PROJECT NO. 30-19101-00 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: The Project Manual and Drawings to the above referenced project are hereby amended as follows:

DRAWINGS

Note all changes to drawings are clouded with Delta 5

ITEM NO. 1 - SHEETS A1.1, A9.1 1. Replace sheets of same designation to show change to gate (2 drawings in total.)

ITEM NO. 2 - SHEET CP0.2

1. Replace sheet of same designation to fix error in deferred submittals (1 drawing in total)

SPECIFICATIONS

Note all changes to specifications are clouded with Delta 5

ITEM NO. 3 - SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 011000, 012976, 014500, 015000, 017839, 033000, 051200, 071416, 074213.13, 081113, 083113, 083513.23, 084113, 084313, 211316, 322114, 270000, 311000, 321216, 321243

1. Replace sections of same designation to reflect changes (20 sections in total.)

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION ITEM NO. 4 - BID RFI COMMENTS.PDF

1. All Pre-Con RFI questions and responses are attached.

SPECIFICATION CLARIFICATIONS ITEM NO. 5 - RLB SPEC COMMENTS.PDF

1. Reference this document for changes to specifications.

ADDENDUM NO. ADD-1 PINAL COUNTY ATTORNEY’S OFFICE PINAL COUNTY FACILITIES MANAGEMENT PROJECT NO. 30-19101-00 FLORENCE, AZ

OUTSTANDING ITEMS ITEM NO. 6 - OUTSTANDING ITEMS.PDF

1. Reference this document for a list of forthcoming items.

SPECIFICATION CLARIFICATIONS ITEM NO. 7 - ACCEPTED SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS.PDF

1. Reference this document for accepted substitutions.

END OF ADD-4

PINAL COUNTY ATTORNEY’S OFFICE 30-19101-00

PINAL COUNTY FACILITIES MANAGEMENT 22 JULY 2019

FLORENCE, AZ CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 01 - General Requirements govern work under all Divisions of Specifications.

B. This is a General Contractor Bid delivery method project and will be conducted as such. As

such the General Contractor will manage and coordinate all subcontractors and suppliers for the

work.

C. The Project Manual contains language which will require the contractor to provide special

services. Contractor is advised to review General Requirements and Division 01 requirements

carefully.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Access to site.

4. Work restrictions.

5. Specification and Drawing conventions.

6. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Pinal County Attorney’s Office.

1. DLR Group Project Number: 30-19101-00

2. Project Location: 961 Jason Lopez Circle, Building “F”, Florence, AZ 85132.

B. Owner: Pinal County Facilities Management.

1. Owner's Representative: Archie Carreon [email protected]

C. Architect: DLR Group | Westlake Reed Leskosky.

1. Principal In-Charge: Larry Smith, AIA [email protected]

2. Project Manager: Hans Papke, AIA, NCARB [email protected]

3. Project Architect: David Lyon, RA, LEED AP [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]











SUMMARY 011000 - 2

D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals who have

prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Civil Engineer:

a. Bowman Consulting.

b. Contact: Robert Atherton, P.E. [email protected]

2. Landscape Architect:

a. Logan Simpson

b. Contact: David Case, PLA [email protected]

3. Interior Designer:

a. DLR Group | Westlake Reed Leskosky

b. Contact: Megan Duffy, NCDIQ [email protected]

4. Geotechnical Engineer

a. RAMM Engineering

b. Contact: Ken Ricker, P.E. [email protected]

5. Structural Engineer:


b. Contact: Tom Kramer, P.E. [email protected]

6. Mechanical / Plumbing Engineer:


b. Contact: David Anderson, P.E. [email protected]

7. Electrical Engineer:


b. Contact: Radames Cocco [email protected]

8. Sustainability:


b. Contact: Terry Wohlgenant [email protected]

9. Information Technology:


b. Contact: Jay Salanga [email protected]

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Description: Pinal County Attorney’s Office Building adjacent to the existing superior

courthouse located in Florence Arizona. Provide construction services as indicated in project

description below.

B. The construction of this project will be done in a manner that will not disrupt the function and

operations of the existing facility. Construction and demolition will be done anytime from dawn

to dusk at contractor’s discretion. Construction may occur during the weekend with no limits at

the contractor’s discretion. There are no noise level restrictions during the day, but the Court






















SUMMARY 011000 - 3

staff shall be notified in the weekly updates prior to the scheduled construction activity that may

cause above average noise generation.

C. Work should be considered to run concurrently.

1.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings (Volume III): See drawing index on Drawings.

B. Project Manuals: Volumes I, IIA, and IIB.

C. Addenda: All addenda issued prior to bidding.

1.6 PRECEDENCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to IFB document, page 26, item 2.

1.7 ABBREVIATIONS PERTAINING TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Owner: Pinal County.

B. User: Pinal County Superior Courts.

C. Architect: DLR Group.

D. CFCI: Contractor Furnished Contractor Installed (All work unless note otherwise).

E. OFCI: Owner Furnished Contractor Installed.

F. OFOI: Owner Furnished Owner Installed.

G. CCD: Construction Change Directive.

H. Furnish: To purchase and deliver.

I. Install: To place into final position and connect.

J. Provide: To furnish and install.

K. “As Shown,” “as detailed,” “as indicated,” or words of similar import mean as indicated on the

drawings.

L. “As selected,” ”as approved,” or words of similar import mean as selected by, as prior

approved by, or as accepted by the Architect and Owner.

M. “Approved equal,” “or prior approved equal” shall mean as approved and accepted by the

Architect and Owner prior to bidding. No substitutions are allowed after awarding of Contract.

Delta #5




SUMMARY 011000 - 4

N. “Shall” means mandatory.

O. “As required” means as required by the contract documents.

P. “As necessary” means essential to the completion of the work.

Q. “Concealed” means not visible in the finished work.

R. “Exposed” means visible in the finished work.

S. “Days” means calendar days.

T. Substantial Completion: That stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated

portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the

Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

1.8 Engineer shall equal Architect as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction

1.9 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Failure to visit the site will not relieve the subcontractors from any requirement to furnish

materials or to perform work that is contained within the Contract Documents. Such work will

be performed at no additional cost to the Project.

B. If any subcontractor discovers asbestos, or any other items beyond the scope of this project, the

Owner, Contractor and Architect must be notified immediately so that remediation or other

appropriate actions may be taken

1.10 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with Arizona Revised Statues, Section 13-391, 113-392, 13-1002, 31-203, 31-

204, 32-22, 32-230, 31-231, 31-393, 31-395. These statutes are incorporated into the

Contract Documents and shall apply whenever inmates of the Department of Corrections

are present at the job site and will apply to all officers and employees of the Contractors.

2. See Rules and Regulations for Non-Employees of Department of Corrections.

3. Operations of Contractor: Limited to areas where work is indicated

B. Construction Operations: Limited to the “limits of construction” as noted on the site plan. Any

storage space or yards required shall be coordinated with the owner.

C. Construction Staff Parking: Shall be limited to the area designed on the construction site plan

and will be managed by the General Contractor. No vehicles shall be parked or allowed to be

used within 100 feet of an occupied facility without prior approval of Pinal County Superior

Courts Security Staff.




SUMMARY 011000 - 5

D. Site Access: Vehicles with company logos only are to have access within the construction

fenced perimeter. Personal vehicles will not be allowed inside the fenced construction

perimeter.

E. Operating Facilities: Since this project is within close proximity to Pinal County Detention

Center, all workers, tools and materials that enter are subject to inspections upon entry and exit

and will be required to keep full inventory of all parts and tools.

F. Utility connections: Interruption of utility services to the existing building(s) is not permitted.

Do no connect new utilities to existing utilities without notifying Owner. All utility connections

shall be scheduled with Pinal County with a minimum 48 hours in advance of the Work

1.11 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

A. City and County permits and inspections are required.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all county dust permits and all inspections

necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. This shall include, but not be

limited to:

1. Inspections and Certificates from Town of Florence Fire Department.

2. Inspections and Certificates from the State Fire Marshall.

3. Arizona Corporation Commission

4. ADEQ permits to construct and to operate.

1.12 APPROVED APPLICATORS

A. Where specific instructions in the Specifications require that a particular product and/or material

be applied and/or installed by an “approved applicator” it shall be the Contractor’s

responsibility to insure that any Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor used for such Work is in

fact currently certified by the particular Manufacturer for this type of installation or application.

1.13 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. The site will have fully functional Superior Courts in operation during the time of Work.

B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations.

C. Owner/User will require a 10 day “Shake-down” period prior to occupancy.

D. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement

1.14 REFERENCE DATA

A. Reference data made available to the Contractor is for the Contractor's information only, and

neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for the Contractor's conclusions.




SUMMARY 011000 - 6

B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain all buildings and construction grades, lines, levels,

and bench marks. This Work shall be performed by a licensed Civil Engineer or Surveyor under

the employ of the Contractor, who shall certify to the Architect that he has performed this

service.

C. The Contractor shall not remove any property line markers or monuments, or data established

by the Owner.

1.15 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of

the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

PINAL COUNTY ATTORNEYS OFFICE 30-19101-00



PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012976 - 1

SECTION 012976 - PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes procedures for submitting Applications for Payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Submit pay application and lien wavers in accordance with General and Supplementary

Conditions of the AIA Agreement. Approvals shall be made in accordance with Supplementary

Conditions.

B. Provide supporting data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment.

C. Prior to submitting the pay application for processing the General Contractor will review a draft

of the pay application with the Architect for general concurrence prior to the formal submittal.

3.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Application for payment shall be submitted electronically in .pdf format.


Delta #5




QUALITY CONTROL 014500 - 1

SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standard: Testing, when and where required, will be in accordance with pertinent

codes and regulations and with selected standards of the American Society for Testing and

Materials.

1.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION

A. The Special Inspector shall be a person qualified, certified and licensed to inspect the particular

type of construction or operation requiring special inspection. He shall demonstrate his

competence to the satisfaction of the State of Arizona and the agency requiring such special

inspection.

B. Inspection by the Special Inspector shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to

perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Special Inspectors shall observe the work for conformance with the Drawings and

Specifications and in accordance with the applicable provisions of applicable building code as

identified in Section 01 4100 “Regulatory Requirements.”

1.4 NOTIFICATION

A. Notification of testing laboratory that materials are ready for sampling shall be made by the

Contractor. In the case of soil testing, such notification shall be made at least 24 hours in

advance.

B. Notification of Special Inspector shall be made by the Contractor 24 hours prior to the expected

time for operations requiring special inspection.

1.5 SAMPLING

A. Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, will

be taken by the testing personnel. Sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the

testing laboratory. Deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be

performed by the testing laboratory.





1.6 REPORTS

A. The testing lab will promptly process and distribute required copies of test reports and related

instructions to ensure necessary retesting and replacement of materials with the least possible

delay.

1. Retests of all work shall be specifically indicated by the term "Retest" and shall be

sufficiently descriptive to designate the date, location, and original test information

indicating why the original was not in compliance with documents.

B. The testing laboratory shall distribute copies of reports as follows:

1. 2 copies to the Architect

2. 1 copy to the Structural Engineer

3. 2 copies to the Contractor

4. 1 copy to the Owner

5. Code authorities or authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Special Inspection Reports. Within twenty-four (24) hours after each special inspection, submit

one (1) copy of inspection reports to the Contractor, Architect, and building official. Include

the following:

Date Issued

Project Title and Number

Name of Inspector

Date and Time of Inspection

Identification of Specifications Section

Location in the Project

Type of Inspection or Test

Date of Test

Results of Tests and conformance with Contract Documents

1. All Discrepancies shall be noted and brought to the attention of the Contractor for

correction. If corrections are not made, notify the Architect and Town of Florence

Building Official.

D. Final Special Inspection Reports shall be signed and submitted by the special inspector and shall

state whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of his knowledge, in

conformance with the approved Drawings and Specifications and the applicable workmanship

provisions of the Town of Florence adopted versions of the International Building Codes.

PART 2 - TESTING AND INSPECTION

2.1 TESTS

A. Tests are specified in (but not limited to) the following Sections:

03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

04 2200 Concrete Unit Masonry and Grout

21 1313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

23 0993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls

28 3111 Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System

Delta #5

Delta #5





2.2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Special inspections are generally specified in the following Sections and shall be performed by

the indicated party: ( the list of special inspections is not all inclusive and is governed by the

regulatory agency and the authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor will provide all special

inspections as required.

03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

04 2200 Concrete Unit Masonry

07 8400 Firestopping

05 1200 Structural Steel

Division 21

Division 22

Division 23

Division 26

Division 28

2.3 PATCHING

A. Patching, if required by the taking of samples, shall be made by the Contractor.

PART 3 - PAYMENT FOR TESTING

3.1 INITIAL SERVICES

A. The Owner will contract separately for a third-party, certified materials testing and special

inspection company and will pay for material testing and all special inspection services required

by the Documents, agencies and authority having jurisdiction.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate directly with the testing and special inspections agency for

Work required to be tested/inspected. Contractor shall schedule testing and special inspections

site visits to greatest extent possible. If quantity of trips for testing and special inspections

become excessive due to Contractor lack of coordination and/or scheduling, Owner reserves the

right to backcharge Contractor for excessive site visits.

C. When initial tests indicate noncompliance with the Contract Documents, all subsequent

retesting occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same testing agency and

the cost thereof will be the responsibility of the Contractor.





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: All labor, material, equipment and services necessary to furnish, erect and

maintain temporary facilities and controls and perform temporary work required in the

performance of the Contract, including those indicated and specified. The Drawings identify

materials storage areas allocated to the Contractor for the Work, and he shall limit his storage

and office operations to the defined areas.

B. Maintenance and Removal: Maintain temporary facilities and controls in a clean, proper, safe

operating and sanitary condition for the duration of the Contract. Upon completion of the

Contract, remove all temporary facilities and controls from the premises.

1.3 UTILITIES

A. Electric power as required for the Contractor's use shall be provided and paid for by the

Contractor.

1. Electrical subcontractor will make arrangements for and install all equipment, poles,

wiring, switches, outlets, etc., to provide power and necessary step-down transformers for

power for all lighting and power requirements for construction purposes.

a. At such time as permanent building power distribution system is utilized, this

system may be utilized.

b. Remove all temporary electrical equipment, poles, wiring, switches, outlets, etc.

when no longer needed.

c. At completion of Work, remove and replace all parts of permanent systems

damaged.

B. Subcontractors will make all arrangements; install equipment, piping, and outlets for an

adequate supply of clean water for construction purposes.

C. The Owner will pay for all water costs associated with construction, all in-place building use

and all landscape irrigation.

1.4 TOILET AND HANDWASHING FACILITIES

A. General Contractor will provide temporary toilet and hand-washing facilities for use of all

workmen and enforce their use by all personnel.

1. Provide facilities complying with local and State sanitary laws and OSHA regulations.

2. Maintain in clean, sanitary condition.

3. Provide adequate supplies of toilet paper and hand-sanitizer.





1.5 ACCESSIBILITY OF VALVES AND CONTROLS

A. No equipment that has to be operated or maintained, such as valves, traps, controls, unions,

motors, etc., shall be placed in an inaccessible location.

1. Temporary fencing shall have no barbed wire components.

2. Temporary fencing must have adequate contrast for the safety of the visually impaired –

contrast may be achieved through color variation panels, signage or other means as

approved by the Owner.

1.6 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during the course of construction, of the

type and sizes recommended by the NFPA, State Fire Marshal and the 2015 International Fire

Code to control fires resulting from the particular work being performed and instruct employees

in their use. Place extinguishers in the immediate vicinity of the work being performed, ready

for instant use. In the use of especially hazardous types of equipment, such as acetylene

torches, welding equipment, etc., no work shall commence or equipment be used unless fire

extinguishers of approved type and capacity are placed in the working area available for

immediate use by the workman using the above-mentioned equipment.

1.7 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES, BARRIERS AND FENCES

A. This project is located immediately adjacent to the existing Courthouse which is a secure

facility. All persons, supplies, materials, etc. are searched for anything that may be a weapon or

used as a weapon. The Contractor will maintain a substantially secure continuous barrier

between the existing Court facility envelope and the new construction at all times. At times

when this secure barrier must be breached, security staff will be notified to be present. During

construction inside the secure perimeter of the Courthouse (for Alternate #1) the Contractor will

utilize personnel that have been previously badged for access as a contractor in the courthouse.

As such these construction personnel will keep a detailed inventory of all tools, material etc.

brought into the facility and the same that exits the facility. Any violation of these requirements

or potential security breach is subject to criminal charges and removal from the project.

B. Provide and maintain all chain link fences, barricades, lights, shoring and other protective

structures or devices necessary for the safety of workman, equipment, the public and property as

required by State or municipal laws and regulations, local ordinances, laws and other

requirements of the Town of Florence, Pinal County, State, and other authorities having

jurisdiction with regard to safety precautions, operation and fire hazards.

C. Provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, excavations and

structure free from accumulations of water at all times, whether from underground seepage,

rainfall, drainage or broken line.





1.8 EXISTING SITE PROTECTION

A. Existing or newly established sidewalks, paving, etc., on the site (including the site areas in the

overhead transmission easements), shall, unless directly affected by the Work of this Contract,

be protected against damage of any kind. Work, storage and traffic areas shall be restricted to

those areas immediately adjacent to the construction site as outlined in the contract documents.

Damage of any kind caused by the Work of this Contract shall be replaced before final

acceptance of the Project. The Contractor shall provide protection barricades as required to

maintain all site improvements, whether new or designated to remain.

1.9 NOISE, DEBRIS AND DUST CONTROL

A. Construction work will be adjacent to an active operational courthouse as such noise is a major

factor in disrupting the operations of the Courts. The Contractor will work closely with the

County and Courts to minimize the activities that will disrupt the courts operations. The

Contractor may need to conduct noisy activates during non-courts business hours or as

acceptable with the Courts. In addition there will be some work conducted within the existing

courthouse (if Alternate No. 1 is accepted). This work will need to be closely coordinated with

court staff to minimize disruption of operations.

B. Exercise all possible care to control excessive noise and dust during the construction to keep

these problems to a minimum. Traffic or construction areas shall be sprinkled with water or

chemicals as required by the Owner and in accordance with applicable Town of Florence and

Pinal County requirements.

C. All debris, etc., shall be removed from all pipe, pipe chases or other such remote and hidden

spaces prior to closing of said space.

1.10 FIELD OFFICE, STORAGE ENCLOSURES

A. Temporary office space for use by the Contractor, Owner and Architect will be provided by

Owner in existing facilities.

B. Contractor shall provide all storage enclosures required for his operations.

1. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary enclosures, doors and transparent

plastic windows required to protect building from damage due to vandalism, or the

elements, or to maintain suitable temperature during installation or finishing work.

C. Provide all items required to ensure safety of individuals on site.

1.11 STAGING AREAS

A. Staging of construction materials and activities shall be performed at location(s) as agreed to by

Owner.

Delta #5





1.12 TEMPORARY SIGNS

A. Signs of Contractors and Subcontractors. Subject to prior approval by the Owner as to size,

design, type, location, and local regulations, the Contractor and his Subcontractors may erect

temporary signs for purpose of identification and controlling traffic. The Contractor shall

furnish, erect, and maintain such signs required by safety regulations and necessary to safeguard

life and property.

B. Project Sign shall be furnished and erected by the Contractor as directed by the Architect.

1. Post no other signs on site except as noted, those required by law, and/or those approved

by Owner.

2. Upon completion of the Work, or sooner if directed, remove project signs.

3. Provide a painted sign with project rendering provided by Architect, project name,

owners name, supervisors names, and other names specified by the Owner. For DLR

Group, the following names and titles shall appear on the sign:

a. Principal in Charge: Larry Smith, AIA

b. Project Manager: Hans Papke, AIA, NCARB

c. Project Architect: David Lyon, RA, LEED AP

4. Locate the project sign as directed by the architect.

1.13 ACCESS TO PROJECT SITE

A. Authorized representatives of the Owner (and representative of the Government Agency

involved, and Arizona State Industrial Commission) shall have ready access to project at all

times.





PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included:

1. Throughout progress of the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain an

accurate record of all changes in the Contract Documents, as described in Paragraph 3.1

below.

2. Upon completion of the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall transfer the recorded

changes to electronic format (BIM, level of detail 300) and provide electronic file

documents to Architect and Owner on two external hard drives. In addition, provide two

½ size hard copies of all drawings.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Section 013323.

2. Project Closeout: Section 017700.


A. General: Maintenance of Record Documents shall be the responsibility of one person on the

Contractors staff as approved in advance by the Architect.

B. Accuracy of Records: Thoroughly coordinate all changes within the Record Documents,

making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings

and other Documents where such entry is required to properly show the change. Accuracy of

records shall be such that future searcher for items shown in the Contract Documents may

reasonably rely on information obtained from the approved Record Documents.

C. Timing of Entries: Make all entries weekly after receipt of information.

D. The Architect and the Owner shall examine the Contract Documents at selected intervals to

assure the Contractors compliance for updating entries. Should the Contractor fail to satisfy the

requirements of this section the Owner shall withhold the Contractors monthly payment request

until said requirements are satisfied.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: The Architect's approval of the current status of Record Documents will be a

prerequisite to the Architect's approval of requests for progress payment and request for final

payment under the Contract.

Delta #5





B. Final Submittal: Prior to submitting final Application for Payment, submit the final Record

Documents required by Contract to the Architect and secure his approval.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION RECORD PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: The Contractor shall be required to provide construction photographs as specified in

Section 017600 “Photographic Documentation.”

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected

from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of the

recorded data to the final Record Documents. In the event of loss of recorded data, use all

means necessary to secure the data to the Architect's approval; such means shall include, if

necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal and replacement of concealing materials and,

in such case, all replacements shall be to the standards originally specified in the Contract

Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Job Set: Promptly following award of Contract, secure from the Architect, at no charge to the

Contractor, one electronic BIM file of building documents, as well as Auto Cad files for Civil

and Security/AV.

B. The Contractor shall provide a complete set of Contract drawings in electronic format, clearly

delineating all changes in the Work and dimensioned final locations of all schematically shown

underground utility lines. These Record Drawings shall also reflect all changes due to Addenda

issued at bidding time and change order items during construction, whether added or deleted.

The change order and Addendum items shall be properly referenced by number.

C. The set of record documents shall be maintained at the job site and be readily available for

inspection by the Architect. All changes shall be legibly marked and kept current.

D. In showing changes in the Work, or added work, use the same legends as were used on the

Contract Drawings. Indicate exact locations by dimensions, and exact elevations, given by job

datum. Given dimensions from a permanent point of reference. Given elevations to sewer and

drainage lines to the invert elevation.

E. Mechanical and electrical Record Drawings shall indicate exact routing of electrical feeders,

main piping and ductwork and all concealed piping and conduit systems not easily located

through the accesses provided.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET

A. Identification: Immediately upon receipt of the job set described in Subparagraph 2.1.A above,

identify electronic file with the title "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET."

B. Preservation:

1. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and review by the Owner

and/or Architect, until start of transfer of data to final Record Documents.

C. Making Entries on Drawings: Make entries on Drawings in color easily identifiable. Date all

entries with date modification was performed.

D. Accuracy of Entries: Use all means necessary, including the proper tools and necessary labor

for measurement, to determine actual locations of the installed items.





CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, and finishes for the following:

a. Footings.

b. Foundation walls, grade beams and pier caps

c. Slabs-on-grade.

d. Concrete toppings over steel deck.


1. Section 033543 "Polished Concrete Finishing" for concrete floors scheduled to receive a

polished concrete finish.

2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-ground.

3. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

4. Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and

walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each of the following.

1. Portland cement.

2. Fly ash.

3. Silica fume.

4. Performance-based hydraulic cement

5. Aggregates.





6. Admixtures:

a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials,

supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at

time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing

conditions, and use of other admixtures.

7. Fiber reinforcement.

8. Floor and slab treatments.

9. Liquid floor treatments.

10. Curing materials.

a. Include documentation from color pigment manufacturer, indicating that proposed

methods of curing are recommended by color pigment manufacturer.

11. Joint fillers.

12. Repair materials.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:

1. Mixture identification.

2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.

3. Durability exposure class.

4. Maximum w/cm.

5. Slump limit.

6. Air content.

7. Nominal maximum aggregate size.

8. .

9. Synthetic micro-fiber content.

10. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if

permitted.

11. Include manufacturer's certification that permeability-reducing admixture is compatible

with mix design.

12. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability-reducing admixture matches

dosage rate used in performance compliance test.

13. Intended placement method.

14. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,

weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

2. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending,

and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing,

bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie

spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.





1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

4. Diamond Plate Dowel System

5. Fiber reinforcement.

6. Curing compounds.

7. Floor and slab treatments.

8. Bonding agents.

9. Adhesives.

10. Vapor retarders.

11. Semirigid joint filler.

12. Joint-filler strips.

13. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Portland cement.

2. Fly ash.

3. Aggregates.

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements report, indicating compliance with specified

tolerances.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as an

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified ACI

Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing

ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for

production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Laboratory Testing Agency Qualifications: A testing agency qualified in accordance with

ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated and employing an ACI-certified Concrete

Quality Control Technical Manager.





1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,

Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.

E. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for

testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as an ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, in accordance with ACI CPP 610.1 or an equivalent certification

program.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,

"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

H. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each

entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete subcontractor.

e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality

control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,

curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,

semi-rigid joint fillers, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device

installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and

levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301 (ACI 301M).





1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 and as follows.

1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by

frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)

for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F (1.7 deg C), other than

reinforcing steel.

5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M), and

as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C).

Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water

equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to

cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3. .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.





E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient

to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane

of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in

diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-

drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same

manufacturer's plant.





2. Obtain aggregate from single source.

3. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer.

4. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II, gray.

5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3Mcoarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10

years’ satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar

aggregates and cementitious materials

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that

do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.

a. .

2.5 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,

bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to

concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch (9.5 by 19 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal.

b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite.

c. Vinylex Corp.; Swellseal.

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Monofilament Micro-Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro-fibers engineered

and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 3/4

inches (13 to 19 mm) long.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Monofilament Micro-Fibers:





1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol II P.

2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 150 or

150ML.

3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA Econo-Mono.

4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace MicroFiber.

5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000.

6) Nycon, Inc.; ProConM.

7) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 150.

8) Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber PPM.

2.7 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of

inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates,

hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard.

b. W.R. Meadows.; Liqui- Hard.

C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Refer to Section 03 3361

“Ground Concrete Finish”

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.

b. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).

e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.

h. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.

k. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.

l. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.

m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet.





1. Color:

a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F (10 deg C): Black.

b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 85 deg F (29 deg C): Any

color.

c. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F (29 deg C): White.

D. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315,

Type 1, Class A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or

approved equal:

a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30.

2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or

ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a

Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 in accordance with ASTM D2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II, nonload bearing Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or

freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match

adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement, as defined in ASTM C219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand, as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.





4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested in

accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to

match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement, as defined in ASTM C219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested in

accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs,

based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of

cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs, concrete for parking structure slabs, and concrete with a w/cm below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

5. Use permeability-reducing admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.

2. See General Structural Notes on sheet S0.1 for mix requirements.





B. Drilled Pier Foundations: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:



C. Foundation walls, grade beams and pier caps: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as

follows:



D. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:



3. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's

recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m).

E. Concrete Topping Over Steel Deck: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa at 28 days.


3. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's

recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with

ASTM C94/C94M[ and ASTM C1116/C1116M], and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32

deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and

reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been

performed.

2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable

to testing agency, including the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Secure facilities for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including

continuous electrical power.

4. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.

3.3 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to

prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous

locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.





K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with

items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.

3.5 SLAB-ON-GRADE GRANULAR FILL

A. Granular Course: Install granular fill below vapor retarder, moisten, and compact with

mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).

1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over

granular fill.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Set reinforcing for precast wall panel anchorage as indicated per precast wall panel shop

drawings.

F. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with

wire.





3.7 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on

Drawings or as approved by Architect.

2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and

slabs.

3. Provide Diamond Plate Dowel System in slab-on-grades. Place at all construction joints,

size and spacing as indicated and as recommended by the manufacturer

4. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

6. Space vertical joints in walls at 10’-0” O.C.Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings,

locate vertical joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed

locations where possible.

7. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

8. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete

into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of

concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of control joints after

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive

or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when

cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete

develops random cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.





3.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,

according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and

firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items,

and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.

1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient

installation, and repair defective areas.

2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make

necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.

B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of

concrete placement.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete

delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M), but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete

delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with

ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.

b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly

penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer.

c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose

plasticity.





d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate

concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items

without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence.

2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.

6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.

8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified

limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Tie holes shall remain. Repair

and patch defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-

surface irregularities. Apply light-sandblast finish.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

1.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing

operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish:

1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or

darbied.





2. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one

direction.

3. Apply scratch finish to surfaces [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar

setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>.

C. Float Finish:

1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to

permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with power-

driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats.

2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,

granular texture and complies with ACI 117 (ACI A117M) tolerances for conventional

concrete.

3. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish:

1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or

power-driven trowel.

2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and

uniform in texture and appearance.

3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor

coverings.

4. Do not add water to concrete surface.

5. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view and to be covered with resilient

flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile.

6. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155

(ASTM E1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Slabs on Ground:

1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 35; and of levelness, FL 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 17.

b. Concrete Toppings:

1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 30; and of levelness, FL 20; with

minimum local values of flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 15.

7. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and

placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)]

[1/8 inch (3 mm)].

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations

indicated on Drawings.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.





3.12 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In:

1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.

3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

D. Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts

for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from

manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel

pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.

1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings.

2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.13 CONCRETE CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

1. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during

curing.

2. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather

protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and

during finishing operations. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows:

1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other

similar surfaces.

2. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.

3. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing

period.

D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows:

1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including

floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.





E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped

at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.14 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

3.15 APPLICATION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment

in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Wet cure floors to receive Liquid floor treatments.

2. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and

complete surface repairs.

3. Do not apply to concrete that is less than three seven days' old.

4. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing.

5. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry.

6. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

3.16 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] month(s).

2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joints clean and dry.





C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 1 inch (50 mm) deep in

formed joints.

D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.17 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete:

1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.

2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2

parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling

and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete.

a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm).

b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.

c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent.

d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with

bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.

a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching.

b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:

1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances

specified for each surface.

a. Correct low and high areas.

b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped

template.





2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or

that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar.

a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping.

a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to

match adjacent floor elevations.

b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.

a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement

with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around.

b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding

agent.

c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except

without coarse aggregate.

d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching

mortar.

a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt,

and loose particles.

b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.

c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.

e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.





F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections

and prepare testing and inspection reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.

1. Testing agency shall immediately report to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete

manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents.

2. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner,

Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests.

a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M,

ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test

and inspection:

1) Project name.

2) Name of testing agency.

3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians

performing inspections and testing.

4) Name of concrete manufacturer.

5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing.

6) Date and time of concrete placement.

7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples.

8) Date and time sample was obtained.

9) Truck and batch ticket numbers.

10) Design compressive strength at 28 days.

11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials.

12) Field test results.

13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including

curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial

curing period.

14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days.

C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing

agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size,

design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at

Project site.

D. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

Delta #5





5. Embedded items.

6. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

7. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

8. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

9. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Architect.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for

each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test

for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Slump Flow: ASTM C1611/C1611M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test

for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M:

a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80

deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M:

a. Cast and laboratory cure one sets of four 6-inch (150 mm) by 12-inch (300 mm)

cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast, initial cure, and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for

each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M.

a. Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two

specimens at 28 days.

b. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two

specimens at 28 days.

c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.





7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength,

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Additional Tests:

a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test

results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of

concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other

methods as directed by Architect.

1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with

ACI 301 (ACI 301M), section 1.6.6.3.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.

F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155

(ASTM E1155M) within 2448hours of completion of floor finishing and promptly report test

results to Architect.

3.19 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:

1. Protect from petroleum stains.

2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.

3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.

4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.

5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.

6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.





7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering,

recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

8. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive surface hardener or polished concrete

finish using Floor Slab Protective Covering.





STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Shear stud connectors.

3. Shrinkage-resistant grout.


1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear stud connectors through

deck.

2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel

items not defined as structural steel.

3. Section 099100 "Painting" for painting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in

ANSI/AISC 303.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and

directions for installation.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.






A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment Drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed

and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

B. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):

Provide in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for each welded joint qualified by testing,

including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand-critical welds.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, and fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties.

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Direct-tension indicators.

3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

4. Shear stud connectors.

5. Shop primers.

6. Nonshrink grout.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category SD,





-OR-

Special Inspection shall be conducted at contractor’s expense on the premises of the steel

fabricator in accordance with 1704.3 of the IBC 2012.

-OR-

The fabricator is an “Approved Fabricator” in accordance with section 1704.2.2 of the IBC

2012.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical

welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by

AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for

welding personnel qualification.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.

3. AISC 360.

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes

repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies

after lubrication.

Delta #5





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

B. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M Grade 50 (Grade 345),

C. Channels, Angles ASTM A36/A36M

D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M.

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS

A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325

(Grade A325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH

(ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1,

hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125/F3125M,

Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with

splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel

nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain

C. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, AISI C-1015 through C-1020, headed-stud type, cold-

finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

2.3 RODS

A. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain

B. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M

1. Nuts: ASTM A 63 (ASTM A563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM A36/A36M

3. Finish: Plain.





2.4 PRIMER

A. Steel Primer:

1. Shop Primers: Provide product compatible with system as required per Sections 099100

“Painting,” as appropriate for location and painting system indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Primer: MPI#80.

1. Etching Cleaner: MPI#25, for galvanized steel.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20 ASTM A780/A780M.

2.5 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency

suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in

accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

3. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain

markings until structural-steel framing has been erected.

4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with

SSPC-SP 3.

F. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to

pass through steel members.





1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,

appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for exposed structural

steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel in

accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.9 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

B. Galvanized surfaces. Preparation for Shop Priming: Clean surfaces to be painted per primer

manufacturer’s written instructions. Remove loose rust and mill scale and other spatter, slag,

flux deposits, and any other potential bond-breaking materials.





C. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Prepare galvanized-steel surfaces for shop priming by

thoroughly cleaning steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treating with

etching cleaner.

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness

of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,

edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or

produced to perform tests and inspections.

2. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.

4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear stud connectors in

accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

a. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-

degree flash or welding repairs to any shear stud connector.

b. Conduct tests in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional

shear stud connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear stud connectors already

tested.

5. Prepare test and inspection reports.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with

requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and

elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structural-

steel framing until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with

ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of

plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before

packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so

no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply

with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in





permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes

indicated on Drawings.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be

enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,

appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of

temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special

inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.

3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.





1. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's

option:

1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.

2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not

accepted.

3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or

missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1

for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior

Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-

Performance Coatings."





COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-1

SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Polyurethane waterproofing.



1. Review waterproofing requirements including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Surface preparation specified in other Sections.

b. Minimum curing period.

c. Forecasted weather conditions.

d. Special details and sheet flashings.

e. Repairs.

f. Field quality control.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance

properties of waterproofing.

2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating

substrate.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing.

2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and

outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.





C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the

following products:


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by waterproofing manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds

85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.

2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions

are imminent during application and curing period.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that

fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section,

for warranty period of two years.

1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,

insulation, pedestals, etc.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection

course, and molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING

A. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C836/C836M and coal-tar

free.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer

for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated.

C. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil-minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene.

1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

D. Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester

fabric, manufacturer's standard weight.

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

F. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing;

ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications and

Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for

substrate and joint conditions.

1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.

2.4 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course: ASTM D6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass- or mineral-reinforced-

asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows:

1. Thickness: 1/2-inch, nominal.

2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended in writing by waterproofing

manufacturer.





B. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on

one side with plastic film, nominal thickness of 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less

than 8 psi according to ASTM C1621/C1621M and maximum water absorption by volume of

0.6 percent according to ASTM C272/C272M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in

writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing

by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to

ASTM D4263.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide

clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray

affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and

other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and

other voids.

3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS

A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints,

drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and

to recommendations in ASTM C1471/C1471M.

B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first

preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.





3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing

manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C1471/C1471M. Before

coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D4258.

1. Comply with ASTM C1193 for joint-sealant installation.

2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip.

3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip

at least 6 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate

applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

4. Extend sheet flashings for 4 inches onto perpendicular surfaces and items penetrating

substrate.

3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations

in ASTM C1471/C1471M.

B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing

manufacturer.

D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray,

roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.

1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of

entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 120 mils.

2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.

3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.

E. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller,

notched squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method.

1. Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second

coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless

reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with an average dry film total

thickness of 120 mils.

2. Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.

3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.

F. Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and

curing.

G. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent

construction operations.





1. For horizontal applications, install protection course loose laid over fully cured

membrane.

2. For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally cured membrane, which will

act as an adhesive. If membrane cures before application of protection course, use

adhesive.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair

substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.


Delta #5




FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.

2. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam perforated aluminum wall panels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 074293 "Soffit Panels" for metal panels used in horizontal soffit applications.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal

panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose

work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and

louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including

manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment

between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of

other construction that affect metal panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and

inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after

installation.

8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.

9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.







1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,

joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,

and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not

less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied

finishes.

1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of profile, exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size

indicated below:

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other

metal panel accessories.

2. Perforated Aluminum Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,

closures, and other metal panel accessories.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.



approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.





1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly as directed by Architect, including corner,

supports, attachments, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and

surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and

ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of

water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,

denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of

soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Visible rust.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Delta #5





B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-

applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Painting contractor responsible for warranty for all field-applied (post-painted) paint and

finishes. Warranty period to be two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the

following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span unless noted

otherwise on Structural Drawings.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS (MX, RMX, PMX)

A. General: Provide factory-roll formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping

and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to

supports using concealed fasteners. Include accessories required for attachment and fastening.

B. Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MX-1): Formed with interlocking panel edges and

intermediate stiffening ribs between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.

1. Manufacturers: Basis of design product. Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products by the following:

a. Morin - A Kingspan Group Company.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=6938


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457046939






2. Product: Matrix Wall Series.

3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel

sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural

quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 20 gauge.

b. Profile: MX-1.

c. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

d. Color: Panel color to match CENTRIA 9987 Bronze II. Painted one side.

C. Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MX-2): Formed with interlocking panel edges and











b. Profile: MX-2.



D. Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MX-6): Formed with interlocking panel edges and











b. Profile: MX-6.















E. Concealed-Fastener Metal Shade Panels (RMX-1): Formed with interlocking panel edges and











b. Profile: MX-1.0


d. Color: Panel color to match CENTRIA 9987 Bronze II. Painted both sides.

F. Concealed-Fastener Metal Shade Panels (RMX-2): Formed with interlocking panel edges and











b. Profile: MX-2.



G. Concealed-Fastener Metal Shade Panels (RMX-6): Formed with interlocking panel edges and



























b. Profile: MX-6.



H. Perforated Steel Shade Panels (PMX-1):





a. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated

steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;

structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A755/A755M.

b. Thickness: 20 gauge.

c. Profile: MX-1.

d. Perforation: 1/8-inch dia. holes x 1/4-inch spacing.

e. Open Area: 23%.

f. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer, post-painted.

g. Color: Panel color to match CENTRIA 9987 Bronze II. Painted both sides.

I. Perforated Steel Shade Panels (PMX-2):









a. Thickness: 20 gauge.

b. Profile: MX-2.

c. Perforation: 1/8-inch dia. holes x 1/4-inch spacing.

d. Open Area: 23%.

e. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer, post-painted.

f. Color: Panel color to match CENTRIA 9987 Bronze II. Painted both sides.

J. Perforated Steel Shade Panels (PMX-6):





















a. Thickness: 20 gauge.

b. Profile: MX-6.

c. Perforation: 1/8-inch dia. holes x 1/4-inch spacing.

d. Open Area: 23%.

e. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer, post-painted.

f. Color: Panel color to match CENTRIA 9987 Bronze II. Painted both sides.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's

standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements

demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and

seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-

lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored

or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel

manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal

being secured.








2.4 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable

if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize

contrast.

C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored

acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

D. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than

70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

1. Examine, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and

anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel

manufacturer.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages

according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,

sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise

indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with

provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

5. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.

Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use

galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the

exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect

against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at

location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for

neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels.

3. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress

washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in

predrilled holes.

E. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and provide for

thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

F. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners

where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and

seams that are permanently watertight.





1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true

to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet

metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of

corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not

be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not

less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel

manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and

sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.13




HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames.

2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.


1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access

control and security systems.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance

ratings, and finishes.





B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems.

7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

8. Details of accessories.

9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For door inspector.

1. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101,

Section 7.2.1.15.4.

2. Submit copy of DHI Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of fire-rated hollow-metal door and frame assembly for

tests performed by a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with performance

requirements.

C. Field quality control reports.


A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and

number to which door accesses.


A. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of fire-

rated door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, section 5.2.3.1 and the

following:

1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI)

certification.

B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of egress

door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the

following:






certification.


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection

during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded

to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place

on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each

stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection

ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or

UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft

control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based

on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.2 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges.

f. Core: Manufacturer's standard.





g. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffener or laminated

mineral board core for fire-rated doors.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame.

c. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with

minimum A60 coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges.

f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material

as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.

g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of

weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to

escape.

h. Core: Manufacturer's standard.

i. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffener with insulation

core for fire-rated doors.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A60 coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 BORROWED LITES

A. Fabricate of metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.





B. Construction: Full profile welded.

C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections.

Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide

alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as

metal as frames.

D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless

otherwise indicated.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame

standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames

with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height

above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension

clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of

underlayment.

D. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill

phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M

or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M,

Class B.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for

exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,

pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for

attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.





F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion

characteristics.

G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations

require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or

angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Sidelite Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,

fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs

by welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated

mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling,

and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for

hardware.

C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of

stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each

glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors

and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and

frames.

4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.





2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.9 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111, with blades or

baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-thick steel frame.

1. Sight proof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y blades.

2. Lightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with baffles to prevent light from

passing from one side to the other.

3. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by

actuating fusible link and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type

and fire-resistance rating indicated by same qualified testing and inspecting agency that

established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.

B. Form corners of moldings with hairline joints. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of

exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without

damage to completed Work.





a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by

welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush,

and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.

3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances

specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-

metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Inspection Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to

furnish reports to Architect.

B. Inspections:

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door according to NFPA 80,

Section 5.2.

2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door

equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically

controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements

according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.

C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply

with specified requirements.

D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly

installations comply with specified requirements.

E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating

compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

Delta #5





3.4 REPAIR

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint

according to manufacturer's written instructions.





ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete

assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size.

C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.


1. Fire-Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80, section

5.2.3.1.

2. Submit copy of DHI Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.


A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of applicable room name and number in which

access door is located.


A. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of fire-

rated door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, section 5.2.3.1 and the

following:






certification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and

labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to

NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges (For walls with tile finishes):

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Babcock-Davis.

b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall.

4. Stainless Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062-inch, 16 gage, ASTM A480/A480M

No. 4 finish.

5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.

6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.

B. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (For walls / ceilings with gyp. bd. finishes):


following:

a. Babcock-Davis.



2. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board

installation and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.

4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064-inch, 16 gage factory primed.

5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.

6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.

C. Exterior Flush Access Doors:


following:























a. Babcock-Davis.



2. Description: Weatherproof assembly, with face of door fit flush with frame and with

exposed frame. Include extruded door gaskets and minimum 2-inch-thick fiberglass

insulation.

3. Locations: Wall.

4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064-inch, 16 gage, factory primed.


6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch operated by handle, with keyed lock in handle.

2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges (For walls with tile finishes):


following:

a. Babcock-Davis.



2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed

in sheet metal; with exposed flange, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall.

4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.

5. Stainless Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.038-inch, 20 gage, ASTM A480/A480M

No. 4 finish.


7. Latch and Lock: Self-latching door hardware, operated by knurled-knob.

B. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (For walls / ceilings with gyp. bd.

finishes):


following:

a. Babcock-Davis.



2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed

in sheet metal; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation, self-closing door,

and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.

4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.

5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036-inch, 20 gage, factory primed.

6. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040-inch, 20 gage, factory primed.


























2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879/A879M, with cold-rolled steel

sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with

minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.

Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

E. Stainless Steel Flat Bars: ASTM A666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines,

or blend into finish.

F. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

G. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish

mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to

types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely

attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed.

2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.





C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Stainless Steel Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2. Polished Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce

uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.


A. Inspection Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to

furnish reports to Architect.

B. Inspections:

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated access door in accordance with

NFPA 80, section 5.2.





E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated access door indicating


Delta #5





3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.





ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 083513.23-1

SECTION 083513.23 – ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal, accordion-folding, sliding fire door; power operated.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,

and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

accessories.

3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure.

4. Show locations of controls, locking devices, detectors or replaceable fusible links, and

other accessories.

5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing and inspecting agency.

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80,

Section 5.2.3.1.





2. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101,

Section 7.2.1.15.4.

3. Submit copy of DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.

Product Certificates: For each type of sliding metal fire door.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sliding metal fire doors to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and

number to which door accesses.




B. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of fire-

rated door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1 and

the following:

1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.

C. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress

door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and

the following:

1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.

D. Fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for ratings as indicated, when tested in

accordance with the requirements of UL 10B and NFPA 252.

E. Automatic closing system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with the

requirements of UL 864 and be listed for use with the assembly in compliance with NFPA 80.

F. Fire Doors shall be capable of resisting an air pressure differential up to 0.05 inches of water

column. Optional air pressure resistance to 0.1 inches of water column available.


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.





1.8 COORDINATION BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR

A. Coordinate with the following:

1. Fire Alarm system.

2. Electrical.

3. Pocket cover doors.

4. Floor and ceiling finish.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Materials and installation shall be warranted against defects in workmanship for a period of one

(1) year from the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Won-Door Corporation, Salt Lake City, UT.

B. Basis of Design Product: Won-Door FireGuard 90.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding metal fire doors from single source from single

manufacturer.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection

ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible

according to NFPA 252 an UL 10B.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 HORIZONTAL, SLIDING ACCORDION-FOLDING FIRE DOORS

A. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

B. Closing and Opening Operation: Automatic Closing System including motor operator and

releasing devices shall be a Microprocessor-based system rated to UL864 (Releasing Device

Control Unit) and shall commence closing upon activation by fire alarm system and/or by low

battery voltage.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=416&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=416&mf=04&src=wd





1. Obstruction Detection: Contact with an obstruction shall cause the door to stop, reverse

enough to remove pressure on the leading edge, pause, and then re-close when in an

alarm condition.

2. Constant pressure to the leading edge while not under motor power shall prevent motor

operation and allow the door to be opened manually.

C. Exit Hardware Operation: Provide fire exit hardware on both sides of door.

1. In emergency mode, a slight pressure on the hardware will cause the door to open a

minimum of 32 inches, pause for 3 seconds, and then automatically close.

2. The open distance shall be field programmable, up to the entire opening width.

3. The pause before re-close shall be field programmable up to 30 seconds.

4. The exit hardware shall have the ability when not in the emergency (fire) mode to be used

to open the door and move it back into the storage pocket.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Door Construction: Single, accordion-type wall suspended with no floor tracks, pantographs, or

interconnections.

1. Panels: 24-gauge steel, V-grooved; modular in design; capable of in-place repair.

2. Perimeter Seals: shall consist of continuous extruded sweeps attached to the top and

bottom of the fire door to form a smoke and draft seal.

3. Hanging Weight: 5.5 pounds per sq. ft. when extended across opening.

4. Finish: All steel panels shall have factory-applied protective coatings.

5. Color: Manufacturer’s standard platinum.

B. Suspension System: Two tracks, on 8-inch centers, attached to overhead structural support.

1. Suspension System: Two tracks, on 8-inch centers, attached to overhead structural

support.

C. Power Supply: 120-volt power source to power supply for main power. On loss of AC power,

the 12v/24v secondary power source shall provide full operation capability.

D. Automatic Closing System shall be listed to UL864 including capability to send and receive

signals from the Fire Control Panel, and shall consist of the following:

1. Microprocessor based Electronic Control box with the ability to:

a. Monitor dual power sources continually for peak performance including:

1) Detect a missing battery, bad battery, or low battery condition.

2) Detect if the charging circuit is bad.

3) Detect fuse failures.

4) Detect high or low AC conditions.

b. Monitor the health of the drive train.

c. Monitor inputs including faults associated with: door block, exit hardware, patron

hardware, and key switches.

d. Run a “watch dog” monitoring circuit which will force a software restart in the

event the software hangs, including tracking the number of resets that occur for

diagnostic purposes.





e. Withstand voltages up to 120 volts AC on the fire alarm input circuit without

damage including the ability to indicate that the alarm circuit has not been wired as

a dry contact, “no voltage” circuit when errant voltages are applied to the circuit.

f. Communicate with other microprocessors on the system via an internal bus

system.

g. Indicate faults or supervised information both locally and at a remote location.

2. Motor Operator Assembly including a DC gear-motor, drive sprocket, clutch, and

position sensors. The motor shall drive the fire door by means of a chain attached to a

stabilizer bar trolley.

3. A door control momentary rocker switch shall be mounted on one side of the door and

shall function as follows:

a. Pressing the upper portion shall close the door and/or clear fault conditions.

b. Pressing the lower portion of the switch shall open the door and/or temporarily

mute the local horn.

4. Leading Edge shall be pressure sensitive such that contact with an obstruction shall cause

the door to stop, pause for 3 seconds, then re-close when in alarm mode.

5. Exit Hardware will be located on both sides of each fire door.

2.5 RELATED CONSTRUCTION

A. Track Support Construction: Provide supports attached to structure and mounting surface for

track including drilling/placement of anchorage points into pre or post tensioned decks,

welding/punching/drilling steel members, and all drywall work; comply with door

manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Pocket Construction: Provide rated pocket as specified for storage of accordion door when

open; comply with door manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

C. Protection: Protect installed work from damage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine floor under door to confirm that floor is level for the full travel of door.

2. Examine wall where track assembly mounts and area behind door to confirm that wall is

smooth and in same plane for the full travel of door.


C. Verify that electrical utilities have been installed and are accessible.





D. Verify that door opening is plumb, and header is parallel with the finished floor.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sliding metal fire doors according to NFPA 80 and manufacturer's written instructions for

type of door operation indicated and fire-protection rating required.

1. Connect fire-detection devices with building's fire-alarm system.

B. Drill necessary holes for anchors in concrete and masonry cleanly, with no broken areas or

spalls. Remove and replace or repair damaged concrete and masonry as directed.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Perform acceptance testing according to NFPA 80.

a. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door in accordance with

NFPA 80, Section 5.2.

2. Test door release, closing, and alarm operations when activated by smoke detector or

building's fire-alarm system. Test manual operation of closed door and pass door. Reset

door-closing mechanism after successful test.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate doors to confirm

proper motor rotation and door performance.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

5. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door

equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically

controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements

according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.





E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating


Delta #5





3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain sliding metal fire doors.

END OF SECTION 083513.23




ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Storefront framing.

2. Manual-swing entrance doors.






and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,

sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of

aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.

c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.

e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.

4. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following:





a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware.

b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes, and number and size

of wires.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard

sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-

inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.

5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to

ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories,

and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-

framed entrance and storefront.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance

manuals.





B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in

maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase

quality-control program.




B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated

by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they

relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or

replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within


1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,

including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this

Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in

construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and

deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.

c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: As indicated on Drawings or an amount that restricts

edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,

whichever is smaller.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch

for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans of less

than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows:





1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies,

including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material

failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members

exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57

lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including

entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20

percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on

building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design

displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 34.

I. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure

tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 3 for protection.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes.

2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Arcadia, Inc (Basis of Design)

2. EFCO Corporation.

3. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.













4. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

3. Glazing Plane: Front.

4. Finish: Color anodic finish, Dark Bronze.

5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not

integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS


following:

1. Arcadia, Inc.



4. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.

B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic

operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with

reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated, and fillet welded or that incorporate

concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and

named manufacturers' products complying with BHMA standard referenced.

















2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

3. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to

set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum

required width.

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other

distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door

Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as

follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and

requirements for description, quality, and function.

C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove

in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.

2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

3. Quantities:

a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf.

b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf.

D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

F. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing

according to UL 305.

G. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control

number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".

H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for

aluminum framing.

I. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as

required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to

comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.





J. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.

K. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location

indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 molded

PVC.

2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with

nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners

on mounting strip.

N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with

maximum height of 1/2 inch.

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;

chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other

system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant,

weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.

1. Color: Match structural sealant.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.

B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.

D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.

E. Steel Reinforcement:

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M.

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with

SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and





pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in

SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Automatic Door Operators: Section 087113 "Automatic Door Operators."

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from 300 series

stainless steel.

C. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate

fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials

and recommended by manufacturer.

D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-

mil thickness per coat.

F. Rigid PVC Filler.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

D. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary

support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.





E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.

F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and

for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest

extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying

finishes.

I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Dark Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.





B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose

or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

D. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

E. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed

fasteners to greatest extent possible.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the

following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

1/2-inch-wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch

wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or

more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.



inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-

framed entrances and storefronts.

Delta #5





1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by

Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water

penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect.

2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in

"Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-

pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

a. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect.

3. Water Penetration: ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure

differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory

testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall

not evidence water penetration.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass

tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and

removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months'

full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include

quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door

hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same

as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.





ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313 - 1

SECTION 084313 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Storefront framing.


1. Section 084126 "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts" for systems without aluminum

support framing.

2. Section 081216 "Aluminum Frames" for interior aluminum framing.






and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of

aluminum-framed storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.

c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.

e. Flashing and drainage.





3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard

sizes.

D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-

inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.

5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed storefronts indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed storefronts, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-

framed storefront.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.




B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated





by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they

relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to

Architect for review.

C. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C1401 for design and installation of storefront

systems.

1.8 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Architect.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 \WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within



a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:







1. Arcadia, Inc. (Basis of Design)



B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed storefront system, including

framing spandrel panels and accessories, from single manufacturer.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum-framed storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure,

including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection

from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.

c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite

or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,

whichever is less.

2. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch

for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans less than

11 feet 8-1/4 inches.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies

do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.









2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

storefront assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural

distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of

span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24

lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested

according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-

load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall

have U-factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to

NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall

have a SHGC of no greater than 0.45 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have an

NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according

to NFRC 500.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

K. Structural-Sealant Joints:

1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.

L. Structural Sealant: ASTM C1184. Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed

by structural-sealant-glazed, aluminum-framed storefronts without failing adhesively or

cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of

sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no

sealant material behind.





2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate

from each substrate, because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal

strength.

2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal.

3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

4. Glazing Plane: Front.

5. Finish: Color anodic finish. Dark Bronze.

6. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

7. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

8. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not

integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;

chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other

system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant,

weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.

B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.

D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.





E. Steel Reinforcement:

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M.

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with

SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and

pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in

SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate

fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials

and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-

mil thickness per coat.

E. Rigid PVC Filler.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for

spandrel glazing.





6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

D. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary

support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using head-and-sill-receptor system

with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members.

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Dark bronze.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C1401

recommendations, including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures,

sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's

written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not

limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:





1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose

or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200

"Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

F. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to

sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler

behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed storefronts to comply with the following

maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

1/2-inch-wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch

wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or

more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.







inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-

framed storefronts.

1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by

Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water

penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in

"Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-

pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

3. Water Penetration: ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure

differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory

testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall

not evidence water penetration.

C. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in

ASTM C1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.

1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade.

2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

D. Aluminum-framed storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Delta #5


PINAL COUNTY FACILITIRS MANAGEMENT 22 JULY 2019


WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies wet-pipe sprinkler systems for buildings and structures.

B. Products specified in this Section with installation not in Contract include sprinkler cabinets

with spare sprinklers and sprinkler wrenches. Deliver to the Owner's maintenance personnel.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for fire barrier sealers.

2. Division 10 Section "Fire Protection Specialties" for fire extinguishers and cabinets.

3. Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping installation.

4. Division 28 Section "Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System" for alarm devices not

specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents (including drawings and calculations)

prepared pursuant to requirements in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of authority having

jurisdiction.

B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: System with automatic sprinklers attached to piping system

containing water and connected to water supply so that water discharges immediately from

sprinklers when they are opened by fire.

B. Sprinkler System Protection Limits: All spaces within areas indicated. Include closets, toilet

and locker room areas, each landing of each stair, and special applications areas.

1. Exception: Areas with other fire extinguishing systems and areas indicated to be without

sprinkler protection.

2. Exception: Light-hazard occupancy, dwelling unit bathrooms 55 sq/ft. and less and

closets 24 sq/ft. and less, that also comply with other NFPA 13 requirements.

C. Wet-pipe sprinkler protection shall be provided throughout all areas within this building. See

Part 2 of these specifications for detailed sprinkler requirements.





1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for fire protection systems

specified.

B. Minimum Pipe Sizes: Not smaller than sizes indicated for connection to water supply piping,

standpipes, and branches from standpipes to sprinklers.

C. The Contractor shall conduct fire hydrant flow tests within 30 days of notice to proceed as

required to obtain hydraulic data needed to prepare design for hydraulically calculated systems.

D. Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to:

1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Office, and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

2. Minimum Density Requirements for Automatic Sprinkler System Hydraulic Design: As

follows:

a. Light Hazard: 0.10 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area.

b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area.

3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

E. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following

minimum working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise.

1. Sprinkler Systems: 175 psig.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For fire protection system components. Include the following:

1. Backflow preventers.

2. Valves.

3. Specialty valves, accessories, and devices.

4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.

5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,

finish, and other data.

B. Preliminary Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Provide preliminary working plans, prepared

according to NFPA 13, to verify pipe routing in exposed areas and sprinkler types as specified,

prior to submittal to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Licensed engineer's sprinkler system drawings specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

authority having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations where applicable.

D. Sprinkler system drawings, identified as "working plans" and prepared according to NFPA 13,

that have been approved by authority having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations

where applicable.

E. Test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material & Test

Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for

Underground Piping."

Delta #5





F. Maintenance data for each type of fire protection specialty specified, for inclusion in "Operating

and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

G. Submit fire flow test data: The fire flow test is to indicate location of test, who performed the

test; state pressure, residual pressure, Pitot pressure, orifice size, and water flow GPM.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by

product name and manufacturer in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval

Guide and that conform to other requirements indicated.

B. Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Marking: On equipment, specialties, and accessories

made to specified standards.

C. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in "National Electrical Code,"

Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals, materials,

hose threads, installation, inspections, and testing.

E. Comply with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals,

materials, installation, inspections, and testing.

F. Licensed Engineer: Submit design drawings, design calculations, and installation inspection

reports. Include seal and signature of registered engineer licensed in jurisdiction where Project

is located, certifying compliance with specifications.

G. Installer's Qualifications: Firms qualified to install and alter fire protection piping, equipment,

specialties, and accessories, and repair and service equipment. A qualified firm is one that is

experienced (minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project) in such

work, familiar with precautions required, and in compliance with the requirements of the

authority having jurisdiction. Submit evidence of qualifications to the Architect upon request.

Refer to Division 01 Section "References" for definition of "Installer."

H. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with

the following:

1. NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 14 “Standard for Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems”

3. NFPA 26 "Recommended Practice for the Supervision of Valves Controlling Water

Supplies for Fire Protection."

4. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

5. NFPA 231 "Standard for General Storage."





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Specialty Valves and Water Motor Alarm Devices:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp.

b. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.

c. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.

d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.

e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

f. Star Sprinkler Corp.

g. Viking Corp.

2. Detector Check Valves:

a. Ames Co., Inc.

b. Cla-Val Co.

c. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp.

d. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.

e. Viking Corp.

f. Watts Regulator Co.

3. Backflow Preventers:

a. Ames Co., Inc.

b. Cla-Val Co.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Febco.

e. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp.

f. Watts Regulator Co.

g. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.

4. Waterflow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:

a. Gamewell Co.

b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.

c. Potter Electric Signal Co.

d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

e. System Sensor Div., Pittway Corp.

f. Victaulic Company of America.

g. Watts Regulator Co.

5. Sprinklers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp.

b. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.

c. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.

d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.

e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

f. Star Sprinkler Corp.

g. Victaulic Company of America.

h. Viking Corp.

i. Tyco.

6. Indicator Valves:

a. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.

b. Grinnell Supply Sales Co., Grinnell Corp.





c. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.

d. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.

e. Nibco, Inc.

f. Sprink-Line by Sprink, Inc.

g. Victaulic Company of America.

7. Fire Protection Service Gate and Check Valves:

a. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.

b. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.

c. Nibco, Inc.

d. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.

e. Victaulic Company of America.

8. Grooved Couplings for Steel Piping:

a. Grinnell Supply Sales Co., Grinnell Corp.

b. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp.

c. Sprink-Line by Sprink, Inc.

d. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.

e. Victaulic Company of America.

2.2 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Sprinkler System Piping Applications" for identification of systems

where pipe and fitting materials specified below are used.

B. Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Grade B. Pipe ends may

be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E or

ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more

than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

D. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5

(DN 125) and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 (DN 150 to

DN 250), plain end.

2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 250, raised ground face, bolt holes spot

faced.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 250, standard pattern, with threads according

to ASME B1.20.1.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, with threads

according to ASME B1.20.1.

D. Grooved-End Fittings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47

malleable-iron, AWWA pipe-size, designed to accept AWWA C606 grooved couplings.

Include cement lining or Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-approved interior coating.

E. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.





F. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Pipe: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 536,

Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or

shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining materials not

included in this Section.

B. Couplings for Grooved-End Steel Pipe and Grooved-End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213,

AWWA C606, ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing, with enamel

finish. Include synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design;

ASTM A 183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved

pipe and fittings.

2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty gate,

ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.

2.6 FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE VALVES

A. General: UL-listed and FM-approved, with 175-psig non-shock minimum working pressure

rating.

1. Option: Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type.

B. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: UL 262, cast-bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside

screw and yoke, rising stem.

C. Indicating Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded

ends, and integral indicating device.

1. Indicator: Visual.

2. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts a.c., prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.

3. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts a.c., prewired, 2-circuit, supervisory switch.

D. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge,

outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and

flanged ends.

E. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger for Use with Indicator Posts: UL 262, iron body, bronze

mounted, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem with operating nut and flanged ends.

F. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with

bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends.

G. Butterfly Check Valves, 4 Inches and Larger: UL 312, split-clapper style, cast-iron body with

rubber seal, bronze alloy discs, stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.





2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175-psig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical

installation, with cast-iron, flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and

single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm

switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, and fill line attachment with strainer.

1. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.

2. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

3. Option: Grooved-end connections for use with grooved-end piping.

B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 400-psig minimum rating, brass, pressure-regulating

type. Include female NPS inlet and outlet and adjustable setting feature. Size 1-1/2 inches or

2-1/2 inches, and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as indicated.

1. Optional Finish: Rough chrome plate.

C. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, 3/4-inch size, spring-loaded, ball check

device with threaded ends.

D. Detector Check Valves: UL 213, galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with air bleed device

for access to internal parts, and flanged ends; designed for 175-psig working pressure. Include

1-piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass

taps in the inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow minimal water flow

through bypass meter when major water flow is required.

2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. General: ASSE standard backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate

indicated and maximum pressure loss indicated.

1. Working Pressure: 150 psig minimum except where indicated otherwise.

2. Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends.

3. Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating, for backflow preventers having cast-iron

or steel body.

4. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.

5. Strainer on inlet, where strainer is indicated.

B. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, consisting of shutoff valves on

inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves for

continuous pressure application.

1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

2.9 SPRINKLERS

A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element conforming to:

1. UL 199, for applications except residential.

B. Sprinkler types and categories are as indicated and as required by application. Furnish

automatic sprinklers with nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification

rating except where otherwise indicated and required by application.





C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include:

1. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.

2. Pendent sprinklers.

3. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.

4. Sidewall sprinklers.

5. Upright sprinklers.

D. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated and bronze.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 1-piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 1-piece, flat.

F. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

G. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for minimum of 6 spare

sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench, suitable for wall mounting. Include number of sprinklers

required by NFPA 13 and 1 wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and

wrench for each style sprinkler on Project.

H. Sprinkler heads listed are as manufactured by Tyco or accepted substitute. All heads submitted

by Contractor shall be UL listed and FM approved.

1. Pendant - Model E

2. Side Wall - Model LD-2

3. Upright - Model E

2.10 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS

A. Specialty Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved made of steel, ductile iron or other materials

compatible with system materials and applications where used.

B. Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213, carbon-steel housing with butylene O-rings and pipe stop, for use

with plain-end, Schedule 5 steel pipe.

C. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends, for use with plain-end

steel pipe.

D. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gaskets,

bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlets.

E. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.

F. Sprinkler Alarm Test Fittings: Ductile-iron housing with 1-1/2-inch inlet and outlet, integral

test valves, combination orifice and sight glass, and threaded or locking-lug ends.

2.11 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections.





B. Electric Operated Alarms: 10" Red Enamel Bell. Located on the exterior of the building. Bell

to be activated by a 120 VAC electrical pulse from tamper, flow switches on riser, all wiring for

bell to be provided and installed by Fire Protection Contractor. Supervised by the fire alarm

panel. Provide brass wall plaque (per NFPA 13, Fig. A 3-12.2) below each bell. Provide wire

bell guard.

C. Waterflow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision type, vane-type waterflow detector, rated

to 250 psig, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single-pole,

double-throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125

volts a.c. and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts d.c.; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard

element to prevent false signals, and tamper-proof cover that sends a signal when cover is

removed.

D. Pressure Switches: UL 753, waterflow switch with retard, electrical-supervision type, SPDT

(single-pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to operate on rising pressure

and signal water flow.

E. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for valves, electrical-supervision type, SPDT (single-pole,

double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full

open position.

F. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for indicator posts, electrical-supervision type, SPDT (single-

pole, double throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than

full open position.

2.12 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inches diameter dial, with dial range of 0-250 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications on pipe and fittings products listed

below. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications.

Piping may be joined with flanges instead of indicated joints. Use grooved-end fittings with

grooved couplings that are made by the same manufacturer and that comply with listing when

used together for grooved-coupling joints.

B. Pipe between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized-steel pipe

instead of black-steel pipe when steel pipe is specified for applications below. Do not use

welded joints.

C. Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller: ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel pipe with

threaded ends, cast-iron or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

D. Sizes 2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated,

grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved

joints.





E. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings;

and welded joints.

F. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches to 6 Inches: ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel pipe with

threaded ends, cast-iron or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

G. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches to 6 Inches: ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut-

groove ends, grooved-end steel pipe fittings, and grooved-coupling joints.

H. Piping Arrangement:

1. All piping shall be concealed in walls, above ceilings, or routed in a cover box. See

architectural for cover box.

2. The piping shall be arranged such that a clear access is provided to all equipment or

devices that require maintenance. Piping that does not meet the above requirements will

be relocated at the Contractor's expense. The sprinkler piping shall be routed as close to

the structural deck as possible.

3. All piping shall be installed in such a manner as to present an orderly and neat

installation. Valves, instruments, and other special items shall be placed in locations

convenient for operation by the operating personnel. Piping runs shall be plumb or level,

except where pitch for drainage is required. All piping shall be installed perpendicular or

parallel to the building structure, and floor levels except in special cases consented to in

writing by the Owner.

4. All piping, including tubing, shall be installed in accordance with the following

additional requirements:

a. Piping shall not be installed above, or within a horizontal distance of 3 feet (0.9 m)

from, electrical equipment such as switchgear, switchboards, control panels, motor

controls, contactors, communication equipment, unless written consent of the

Owner is obtained. Improperly located piping shall be removed and relocated at

the Contractor's expense. Piping in areas with finished ceilings, shall be routed

above the ceilings and shall not interfere with ceiling tile removal. Piping in areas

without finished ceilings shall be routed as close to the structural deck as possible.

Sidewall sprinklers shall be used, where possible, to minimize the amount of

exposed branchline in areas with decks lower than 10 feet (3 m). Pipe routing

shown along a room wall shall be as tight as possible to the wall to allow the

construction of a soffit around the piping.

b. Piping under ductwork, etc. shall be installed with a minimum of 7'-6" (2.3 m)

headroom over passageways and walkways. Clearance less than 7'-6" (2.3 m) shall

require the acceptance of the Owner. Piping shall not interfere with day-to-day

operation or maintenance of any building equipment.

c. Drains:

1) The Contractor's piping shall be arranged with adequate slope, and with

valve vents and drains, so as to be completely drainable.

2) Sprinkler system main drains, inspectors test connections and trim drains

shall terminate not less than 18 inches (460 mm) above a Contractor

provided concrete splash block outside each building, unless specifically

noted otherwise. If valve trim drain lines are manifolded, valves or check

valves shall be provided to prohibit water from backflowing out trim funnel.





3) All low points shall be provided with drains and valves. Trapped sections

over 5 gallons (19 liters) shall be piped to within 2 feet (610 mm) of the

ground floor along columns. Drains in finished areas shall be coordinated

with the plumbing contractor to terminate at floor drains. The Contractor

shall provide signs for all drains in accordance with NFPA 13.

d. Inspector's Test Connections: Inspector's test connection details shall be shown on

Contractor's shop drawings. The inspector's test connection shall be provided at

the most remote point on the system. The test valves shall be located 6 to 7 feet

(1,829 to 2,133 mm) above the finished floor elevation. Inspector's test

connections shall drain to a floor drain capable of accepting the maximum

acceptable flow, or to the outside 6 inches (152 mm) above a Contractor provided

concrete splash block unless indicated otherwise on the contract drawings. The

Contractor shall provide signs for all test connections in accordance with

NFPA 13.

e. Pipe Supports: The Contractor shall furnish all piping, pipe supports, valves, and

fittings required for complete fire protection systems in compliance with the

appropriate NFPA Sections, its appendices, and these specifications. Pipe support

assembly sketches are required for each configuration to be used for the project.

The Contractor's shop drawings shall note hanger configuration types.

5. Piping, Fittings, and Materials: Materials and connection types for pipe and fittings shall

be as described below.

a. Piping: All details of the underground piping installation including materials,

trenching, backfilling, embedment, anchoring, flushing and testing shall be in

accordance with the requirements of NFPA No. 24 and the site utilities

specifications regarding domestic and fire protection service mains. Buried water

supply piping shall be Ductile Iron, Cement Lined. The ductile iron shall

transition with the PVC underground at the point where work under this contract

begins. Restraints for all changes of direction shall be accomplished by thrust

blocks.

b. Fire protection water supply piping within the building up to the system isolation

valves shall be black steel, Schedule 40 minimum.

c. Sprinkler piping downstream of the isolation valves on wet-pipe systems shall be

black steel, Schedule 40 minimum.

d. All piping shall also meet the requirements of NFPA 13.

e. As prescribed by NFPA 13, Section 3-12.1.1, all threaded fittings and pipe shall

conform to ANSI Standard B1.20.1, Pipe Threads. The Contractor shall have a

full set of taper threaded ring and plug gauges referenced by ANSI B1.20.1 and

shall check every fifteenth thread cut in the fabrication shop. Threads found out of

tolerance shall be rejected, and the tool dies shall be adjusted or replaced until

within tolerances. Field threading shall be performed only if absolutely necessary.

Standard threaded fittings purchased from an approved manufacturer and not cut

by the Contractor or fabricator need not be checked by the Contractor.

f. Fittings:

1) Except as otherwise specified herein, fittings such as tees, couplings,

crosses, elbows, caps, and reducers shall be used for all changes in direction,

intersections, size changes, and end closures of piping. All welded fittings

shall be hot-dipped galvanized following welding to galvanized pipe.

2) Threaded or flanged fittings shall be cast iron, Class 125 minimum.





3) Bushings shall not be used in place of standard fittings. If fittings are

approved with a specific pipe manufacturer or grooving process, that pipe or

grooving process shall be provided. Plain end fitting are prohibited.

6. Cleaning: The inside and outside of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be free from dirt,

sand, and loose mill scale before being erected. Before placing in service, all lines shall

be thoroughly blown and/or flushed.

7. Piping Supports:

a. The Contractor shall furnish and install all required supports for all piping erected

under these specifications. The term "piping supports" includes all assemblies

such as hangers, floor stands, anchors, brackets, and any supplementary steel

required to attach piping supports. NFPA 13 minimum pipe supports are

acceptable only when also in compliance with these specifications. Piping support

systems shall be FM approved.

b. The Contractor shall be responsible for location and design of all supports for all

piping required under these specifications.

c. All piping support spacing shall be designed in accordance with the requirements

of NFPA No. 13.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping

joint construction.

B. Grooved-End Pipe and Grooved-End Fitting Joints: Use grooved-end fittings and grooved

couplings that are made by the same manufacturer and that are listed for use together. Groove

pipe and assemble joints with grooved coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to

coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Groove Type: Cut.

2. Groove Type: Rolled.

3.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect fire protection piping to water service piping of size and in location indicated for

service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in Division 22 Sections for water

piping systems.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at

connection to water service piping.

3.4 WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION

A. Connect fire protection piping to water supply piping of size and in location indicated.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at

connection to water supply piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated

at connection to water supply piping.





3.5 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping

installation.

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved "working plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval

from authority with jurisdiction. File written approval with the Architect prior to

deviating from approved "working plans."

C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions

in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes 2 inches and smaller. Unions are not required on

flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved couplings.

E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch and

larger connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized

and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain headers adjacent to standpipes

when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipe.

I. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

J. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13.

1. Install hanger and support spacing and locations for steel piping joined with grooved

mechanical couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems.

2. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake

damage.

K. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

riser. Include pressure gages with connection not less than 1/4 inch and with soft metal seated

globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit

removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.6 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.





3.7 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for installation of

general-duty valves. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and

specialties according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's written instructions, and the authority having

jurisdiction.

B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection service valves supervised-open, located to control sources

of water supply except from fire department connections. Where there is more than 1 control

valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating portion of system controlled

by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of

check valves in potable water supply sources.

D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including

bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection.

E. Detector Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow, located to detect system leakage

and unauthorized use of water and to prevent backflow into public water mains. Install bypass

with water meter, with gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from

meter.

3.8 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

B. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.

C. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

D. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with following finishes:

1. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces exposed to

view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax-coated where exposed

to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

2. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

3. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

4. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.

B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use

dry-type sprinklers supplied from heated space.

3.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS

A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated in locations indicated. Refer

to Civil plans for size and location.





B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains and where

indicated. Drain to floor drain.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.

B. Connect water supplies to sprinkler systems. Include backflow preventers.

C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.

D. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm system.


A. Perform field acceptance tests of each fire protection system.

1. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter "System

Acceptance."

B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures specified, then retest to

demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect.

2. Report test results promptly and in writing to authority having jurisdiction when required.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and authority having jurisdiction.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish

with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited.

3.14 COMMISSIONING

A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed

by manufacturer, proceed as follows:

1. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been installed

correctly and operate correctly.

2. Verify that excess pressure pumps and accessories have been installed correctly and

operate correctly.

3. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.

4. Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have

been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers.

5. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and

have guards where required for applications.

6. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of backflow preventer.

7. Check that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire

department equipment and have correct pressure rating.

8. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler systems with water.

9. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

10. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.





3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance

information.

B. Schedule demonstration with at least 7 days' advance notice.





UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING 232114 - 1

SECTION 232114 - UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:

1. Direct buried factory pre-fabricated and pre-insulated piping system for Chilled Water.

B. Section Includes:

1. Steel pipes and fittings.

2. Cased piping system (prefabricated insulated piping).

1.3 BIDDING

A. Contractors shall bid exclusively on approved materials and manufacturers. It is the

responsibility of all bidders to obtain a letter from the pre-insulated piping manufacturer, prior

to bid, indicating that they are submitting pricing in complete compliance with these

specifications. The letter must be signed by an owner or officer of the company and notarized.

Any cost impact for non-compliance with these specifications will be the responsibility of the

contractor. This letter shall be included with the bid.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing underground prefabricated insulated

hydronic piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 200 psi at 200 deg F. (Normal Operation range 44 – 56 deg. F.)


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Cased piping.

B. Submit shop drawings indicating material data, locations and sizes of expansion loops, anchors,

a list of materials proposed for this Project and indicate thickness of material for each service.

The design of expansion loops, anchors, thrust blocks, etc. shall be approved by the

manufacturer and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Arizona.

Manufacturer is to provide engineered line drawings showing thrust block details, locations and

sizes as well as anchor points and sizes. Shop drawings must be reviewed and approved by the

Architect / Engineer prior to construction or installation of any piping.

Delta #5





C. Submit shop drawings for all isolation valve vaults. Clearly indicate valving to be located

within valve box vault showing all pipe sizes, valve sizes, clearances, and valve box/vault

dimensions.

D. Installer Certification: Submit written certification from manufacturer of prefabricated

insulated piping system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer to install specified

piping system. Provide copy of certification to Architect / Engineer before award of

prefabricated insulated piping work.

E. Product Data on each component of the prefabricated insulated underground piping, including

rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished

specialties and accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic specialty and special

duty valve specified.

1. Furnish flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,

based on manufacturer's testing.

F. Maintenance Data for hydronic specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating

and maintenance manual specified in Division 01 and Division 23 Sections.

G. Shop Drawings: For underground hydronic piping. Signed and sealed by a professional

engineer.

1. Calculate requirements for expansion compensation for underground piping.

2. Show expansion compensators, offsets, and loops with appropriate materials to allow

piping movement in the required locations. Show anchors and guides that restrain piping

movement with calculated loads, and show concrete thrust block dimensions.

3. Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show piping in trench, conduit, and cased

pipe with details showing clearances between piping, and show insulation thickness.


A. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not

less than 1 inch equals 50 feet (1:500) and at vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals

5 feet (1:50). Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of

other utilities crossing hydronic piping.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Material Test Reports: For cased piping.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Product Data.

H. Installation Manuals.

I. Complete shop drawings including elbows, tees, flanges, and anchors.





J. Stress Analysis on all underground pre-insulated piping systems.

K. All submittals must be stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Arizona

that is in direct employ of the manufacture.

L. Submittals will only be accepted from pre-approved manufactures. No exceptions will be

made.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,

products, and installation.

1.8 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide the services of a certified manufacturer’s representative to instruct the contractor on the

installation procedures of the piping, and to be present on site to assist during critical stages of

installation and testing. The representative must be a direct employee of the manufacturer who

is certified to provide Field Technical Assistance (FTA). This service may not be done by a

Sales Representative Firm of the manufacturer.

B. One (1) day of FTA shall be provided for each 500 feet of pipe trench installed with a minimum

of three (3) days required. The FTA representative shall observe critical periods of the

installation including the following:

1. Initial inspection of the trench and initial pipe placement.

2. Initial field joint closure instruction and inspection.

3. Any field modification to the piping system.

4. Initial backfill of piping in trench.

C. Include a report consisting of the installation log indicating actual installed conditions and test

certification signed by the manufacturer’s representative above, the contractor, and the

Architect’s representative. Include certification by the manufacturer’s representative that the

installation is in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall provide testing on the polyurethane foam as indicated

within these specifications.

1.9 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A. Provide Special Warranty on all prefabricated pre-insulated piping systems installed under this

Section. The prefabricated pre-insulated piping system manufacturer is to provide a written

warranty signed by the piping manufacturer and his installer. The warranty covers products

against defects as to workmanship or product failure to the extent that should defects appear

within 2 years from substantial completion of the Project, the piping shall be repaired or





replaced at no cost to the building Owner. Substantial completion date is defined by the

Contract Documents. The warranty also covers prefabricated pre-insulated piping failure,

fitting failure, or system leaks due to product failure or improper installation and will cover any

costs related to removal and reinstallation of these products, excavating, backfilling / trenching,

paving, sidewalks, landscaping, etc. as well as any costs for damages that might arise from

defective materials or workmanship.

1. Warranty period from date of Project substantial completion: 2 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, black with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in

"Piping Application" Article.

B. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Class 250.

C. Malleable-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 250.

E. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

G. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9 and ASTM A 234, seamless or welded.

1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for

wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.2 CASED PIPING SYSTEM

A. Description: Factory-fabricated piping with carrier pipe, insulation, and casing.


following:

a. Insul-Tek Piping Systems, Inc.

b. Perma-Pipe, Inc.

c. Rovanco Piping Systems, Inc.

d. Thermacor Process, L.P.

e. Thermal Pipe Systems.

f. Urecon Ltd.

g. Insul-Pipe

h. Or approved equal.

B. All straight sections shall be factory pre-insulated and jacketed. The piping system

manufacturer, to determine the stresses and displacements of the service pipe, shall analyze the

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456812285&mf=04&src=wd
















piping system layout. The piping system design and manufacture shall be in strict conformance

with ANSI B31.1, latest edition. Installation of the piping system shall be in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Carrier Pipe: Schedule 40, steel pipe and fittings, all welded joints.

D. Service Pipe shall be Standard Weight, ASTM A53, Grade B, ERW carbon steel. All joints

shall be butt-welded for sizes 2-1/2 inches and greater, and socket welded for 2 inches and

below. Where possible, straight sections shall be supplied in 40 foot random lengths with

piping exposed at each end for field joint fabrication.

1. The exterior steel pipe, fittings, and anchor surface shall be abrasive blast-cleaned to a

minimum of a near white surface, SSPC-SP10-63T. Profile must be a minimum of

1.5 mil peak to valley range. Any areas of rust bloom or oil shall be wiped and re-

blasted. After blasting, the steel service pipe shall be coated with Epoxy. The epoxy

coating shall be a two part coating consisting of a base material and curing agent spray

applied to a minimum thickness of 8-12 mil. The coated pipe and fittings shall be factory

holiday tested at 1,000 volts to ensure a void free coating. Areas of the conduit not

passing the holiday test shall be patch coated and retested. Certified test reports shall be

submitted to the owner and or engineer by the manufacturer upon completion of testing.

Fusion Bonded Epoxy, applied to the same thickness, is acceptable after pipe has been

cleaned as indicated above.

E. Carrier Pipe Insulation:

1. Polyurethane Foam Pipe Insulation: Rigid, cellular, high-pressure injected between

carrier pipe and jacket.

a. The service pipe insulation shall be polyurethane foam with 2 lb/ft³ minimum

density, 90% minimum closed cell content, Insulation Compressive Strength of 40

psi, and maximum initial thermal conductivity of 0.16 Btu-in/hr-ft²-Fº. The

insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the service pipe and the

jacket and shall be bonded to both. Systems using open cell insulation or a

nonbonded design shall not be allowed. The polyurethane foam insulation shall be

tested by the manufacturer for mechanical and thermal properties to assure

compliance with the above values. All test samples will be taken from production

material, identified, tagged and tested in accordance with the table below. Test

reports showing results will be furnished to the owner and/or engineer for

approval. Data supplied by the polyurethane foam chemical supplier is not

acceptable.





Attribute ASTM

STD

Sample

Frequency Requirement

Insulation

Density D 1622 Once per day > 2.0 lb/ft³

Insulation

Compression

Strength

D 1621 Once per day > 40 PSI

Insulation Closed

Cell Content D 2856 Once per day > 90%

Insulation Thermal

Conductivity C 518 Once per day

< 0.16 BTU-

inch/hr/ft²/ºF

All insulation shall be provided to a minimum thickness of two (2) inch on Chilled

Water and one and two (2) inch on Hot Water.

F. Casing: HDPE.

1. The outer protective insulation jacket shall be seamless high density polyethylene

(HDPE) in accordance with ASTM D1248, Type 3, Class C. PVC or tape materials are

not allowed. The minimum thickness of the HDPE jacket shall be 0.080".

G. Field Joints: Insulation applied at the field joints shall incorporate a removable mold. Once the

insulation is applied the mold must be removed and the insulation visually inspected for voids.

Any voids found will be filled prior to the application of the shrink sleeve as stated with in this

document. Field joint systems that don’t include the removable mold for insulation inspection

will not be allowed.

H. End seals: One of the following End Seals shall be factory installed on all exposed insulation

on pipe and fittings prior to shipment.

1. Polyethylene End Seals shall be the same as the jackets on the straight lengths of pipe.

2. A single piece, polyethylene molded heat shrink end seal that is specifically designed for

each pipe size.

3. Mastic or painted on end seals shall not be allowed.

I. All pipe, fittings (elbows, tees, reducers, anchors, etc.) shall be coated (see above) factory

prefabricated and pre-insulated. Straight tangent lengths shall be added to all ends, so that all

field joints are at the straight sections of pipe. Bending of pipe elbows is allowed. Fitting

insulation jackets shall be molded or butt fusion welded HDPE or chopped spray-up FRP.

Gluing, taping, shrink wrapping or hot air welding of the insulation jacket shall not be allowed.

J. Field modification (cutting of pipe, re-routing, etc) to the pre-insulated pipe shall be done in the

presence of the manufacturer’s field technician in accordance with Paragraph 1.8.A above.

K. The service pipe shall be hydrostatically field tested to 150 psig or 1.5 times the design pressure

whichever is greater. Insulation shall then be poured in place into the field joint area. All field

applied insulation shall be placed only in straight sections of pipe. Field insulation of fittings is

not acceptable. The installer shall seal the field joint area with a heat shrinkable adhesive

backed sleeve. Backfilling shall not begin until the heat shrink sleeve has cooled. All

insulation and jacketing materials for field joints shall be furnished by the system manufacturer.





L. Casing accessories include the following:

1. Joint Kit: Half-shell, pourable or split insulation, casing sleeve, and shrink-wrap sleeve.

2. Expansion Blanket: Elastomeric foam, formed to fit over piping.

3. End Seals: Shrink wrap the casing material to seal watertight around casing and carrier

pipe.

M. Source Quality Control: Factory test the carrier pipe to 150 percent of the operating pressure of

system. Furnish test certificates.

2.3 UNDERGROUND VALVES

A. Valves shall be resilient wedge type rated for 250 psig water working pressure and (30 -

200 deg F temperature range). All ferrous components shall be ductile iron. Valves 4" - 16"

shall be in full compliance with AWWA C515. the words "D.I." or "Ductile Iron" shall be cast

on the valve or stamped on a permanently attached corrosion-resistant metal tag. The wedge

shall be ductile iron encapsulated with nitrile rubber (2 - 12" sizes) or SBR rubber (14" - 30"

sizes).

B. The wedge shall be symmetrical and seal equally well with flow in either direction.

C. Valves shall be NSF Standard 61 certified.

D. Bolting materials shall develop the physical strength requirements of ASTM A307 and may

have either regular square or hexagonal heads with dimensions conforming to ANSI B18.2.1.

Metric size, socket head cap screws therefore are not allowed.

E. Operating nut shall be constructed of ductile iron and shall have four flats at stem connection to

assure even input torque to the stem.

F. All gaskets shall be pressure energized O-rings.

G. Stem shall be sealed by three O-rings. The top two O-rings shall be replaceable with valve fully

open and while subject to full rated working pressure. O-rings set in a cartridge shall not be

allowed.

H. Valve shall have thrust washers located with (1) above and (1) below the thrust collar to assure

trouble-free operation of the valve.

I. All internal and external surfaces of the valve body and bonnet shall have a fusion bonded

epoxy coating, complying with ANSI/AWWA C550, applied electrostatically prior to assembly.

J. Valves shall be American Flow Control's Series 2500 Ductile Iron Resilient Wedge Gate Valve,

or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. See Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.





3.2 PIPING APPLICATION - CASED PIPING SYSTEM (UNDERGROUND PREFABRICATED

INSULATED PIPE SYSTEM)

A. Chilled-Water Piping:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:

a. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 250, cast-iron, welded.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be the following:

a. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast, and welded joints.

b. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact-pattern mechanical-joint

fittings; and mechanical joints.

3. Cased piping with polyurethane carrier-pipe insulation.

a. Piping Insulation Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm).

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping

as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Remove standing water in the bottom of trench.

C. Do not backfill piping trench until field quality-control testing has been completed and results

approved.

D. Install piping at uniform grade of 0.2 percent. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4

(DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points and

elsewhere as required for system drainage. Install manual air vents at high points.

E. In conduits, install drain valves at low points and manual air vents at high points.

F. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. See Section 23 0517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping" for sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals through exterior building walls.

J. Secure anchors with concrete thrust blocks. Concrete is specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. See Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utilities" for basic piping joint

construction.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.





C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Conduit and Cased Piping Joints: Assemble sections and finish joints with pourable or split

insulation and exterior jacket sleeve, and apply shrink-wrap seals.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tapes with locator wires during back filling of

trenches for underground hydronic piping. Locate tapes 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,

directly over piping. See "Earth Moving" Sections for warning-tape materials and devices and

their installation.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Slope all piping as to vent and drain to building or Vaults.

B. Utility Marking Tape shall be installed over the entire length of each underground pipe

approximately 12 inches above the top of pipe line.

C. Anchors (if required) shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Concrete

shall be cast over the anchor plate and conduit and shall be large enough for firm anchorage into

undisturbed soil.

D. All underground piping systems must be inspected by the Owner’s representative prior to

backfilling.

E. All pipes, and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Steps shall be taken in piping system design and installation to avoid

trapping of air in the below-grade piping system. All prefabricated pre-insulated piping is to be

welded joints. The all welded construction is to extend full length of systems, welded systems

are to be welded full length. All building risers are to be factory fabricated and insulated.

F. Factory-trained field technical assistance shall be provided to supervise unloading, installation,

and testing of piping system.

G. Trench and backfill shall be in accordance with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" and

pre-insulated piping manufacturer's recommendations.

H. Provide expansion joints, thrust blocks, expansion loops, concrete yard boxes per pre-insulated,

pre-fabricated piping manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Immediately after installation in the trench, a partial backfill shall be made in the middle of each

unit leaving the joints exposed for inspection. Architect, manufacturer's representative and any

necessary reviewing / inspecting parties shall be notified 2 days prior to joint inspection time.

All joints shall be inspected prior to backfill. After all thrust blocks are poured and cured, a

hydrostatic test of 1-1/2 times operating pressure shall be required for a period of 24 hours.





J. Trench bottom shall have a minimum of 6 inches of sand, pea gravel, or clean, select fill

material as a cushion for the piping per piping manufacturer's recommendations. All field

cutting of the pipe shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

K. All pressure testing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and 2006

CMC or most current. Piping shall be tested with a minimum of 100 P.S.I. but not less than

50 P.S.I. greater than operating pressure. Pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of

24 hours.

L. After hydrostatic test of carrier pipe and jacket, a final backfill of sand selected earth shall be

hand-placed and hand-tamped in 4-inch layers to 12 inches minimum over the top of the jacket.

Remainder of the backfill shall be free of rocks over 2 inches in diameter, frozen earth or

foreign matter. Do not use tracked or wheeled vehicles for tamping.

M. Underground systems shall be buried in a trench not less than 2 feet deeper than the top of the

pipe and not less than 18 inches wider than the combined O.D. of all piping systems. A

minimum thickness of 24 inches of compacted backfill placed over the top of the pipe will meet

H-20 highway loading.

N. The entire underground pre-insulated piping system shall be inspected by the manufacturer as

the work progresses. See "Quality Assurance" article in Part 1 of this Section for quality

assurance requirements. At the completion of the work a detailed report from the manufacturer

shall be provided detailing in writing or by other means (photographs, etc.) all piping has been

installed per manufacturer's fabrication drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.



inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Prepare hydronic piping for testing according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

a. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during

test.

b. Fill system with water. Where there is risk of freezing, air or a safe, compatible

liquid may be used.

c. Use vents installed at high points to release trapped air while filling system.

2. Test hydronic piping as follows:

a. Subject hydronic piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times

the design pressure.

Delta #5





b. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for 10 minutes, examine joints for

leakage. Remake leaking joints using new materials and repeat hydrostatic test

until no leaks exist.

3. Test conduit as follows:

a. Seal vents and drains and subject conduit to 15 psig (105 kPa) for four hours with

no loss of pressure. Repair leaks and retest as required.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



PINAL COUNTY FACILITIES MANAGEMENT 26 APRIL 2019

FLORENCE, AZ DESIGN DEVELOPMENT SET

COMMUNICATIONS 270000 - 1

SECTION 270000 - COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to all following

sections within Division 27.

B. The Contractor shall plan for time for coordination with commissioning agent. Refer to sections

019113, 019114, 019116 for General and Communications Commissioning requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Division requires providing complete functioning systems, and each element thereof, as

specified, indicated, or reasonably inferred, on the Drawings and in these Specifications,

including every article, device, or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item)

reasonably necessary to facilitate each system’s functioning as indicated by the design and the

equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor,

supervision, supplies, tools, equipment, transportation and utilities.

B. Division 27 of these Specifications, and Drawings numbered with prefixes “T” generally

describe these systems, but the scope of the Telecommunications Work includes all such Work

indicated in all of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to: Instructions to Bidders;

Proposal Form; General Conditions; Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural,

Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical and Telecommunications Drawings and

Specifications; and Addenda. Additionally, certain information may be contained on the

Drawings numbered with prefixes “E”.

C. Drawings are graphic representations of the Work upon which the Contract is based. They show

the materials and their relationship to one another, including sizes, shapes, locations, and

connections. They also convey the scope of Work, indicating the intended general arrangement

of the equipment, fixtures, outlets and cabling without showing all of the exact details as to

elevations, offsets, and other installation requirements. Use the Drawings as a guide when

laying out the Work and to verify that materials and equipment will fit into the designated

spaces, and which, when installed per manufacturers' requirements, will ensure a complete,

coordinated, satisfactory and properly operating system.

D. Specifications define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, and workmanship

upon which the Contract is based.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act.

Delta #5





B. AFF Above Finished Floor.

C. AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. ANSI American National Standards Institute.

E. ASTM 35 American Society for Testing and Materials.

F. BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International.

G. EIA Electronic Industries Alliance.

H. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.

I. FCC Federal Communications Commission.

J. FM Factory Mutual.

K. GE Grounding Equalizer (Formerly the TBBIBC).

L. ISP Inside Plant.

M. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

N. LED Light Emitting Diode.

O. NEC National Electric Code.

P. NESC National Electrical Safety Code.

Q. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

R. NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

S. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

T. OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer.

U. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

V. OSP Outside Plant.

W. PVC Polyvinyl Chloride (Thermoplastic Material).

X. RCDD Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

Y. SCC Security Control Center.

Z. TBB Telecommunications Bonding Backbone.

AA. TGB Telecommunications Grounding Busbar.





BB. TIA Telecommunications Industries Association.

CC. TMGB Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar.

DD. TER Telecommunications Equipment Room.

EE. TR Telecommunications Room.

FF. UL Underwriters Laboratories.

GG. UON Unless Otherwise Noted.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Whenever used in these Specifications or Drawings, the following terms shall have the

indicated meanings:

1. Furnish: “To supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,

assembling, installing, and similar operations.”

2. Install: “To perform all operations at the project site, including, but not limited to, and as

required: unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,

working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, testing, commissioning,

starting up and similar operations, complete, and ready for the intended use.”

3. Provide: “To furnish and install complete, and ready for the intended use.”

4. Furnished by Owner (or Owner-Furnished) or Furnished by Others: “An item furnished

by the Owner or under other Divisions or Contracts, and installed under the requirements

of this Division, complete, and ready for the intended use, including all items and

services incidental to the Work necessary for proper installation and operation. Include

the installation under the warranty required by this Division.

5. Engineer: Where referenced in this Division, “Engineer” is the Design Professional for

the Work under this Division, and is a Consultant to, and an authorized representative of,

the Architect, as defined in the General and/or Supplementary Conditions. When used in

this Division, it means increased involvement by, and obligations to, the Design

Professional, in addition to involvement by, and obligations to, the “Architect.”

6. AHJ: The local code and/or inspection agency (Authority) Having Jurisdiction over the

Work.

7. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in 29

CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA, etc.), and acceptable to the Authority having

Jurisdiction (AHJ) over this project. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories and

standards listed are used only to represent the characteristics required and are not

intended to restrict the use of other NRTL’s that are acceptable to the AHJ, and standards

that meet the specified criteria.

8. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Architect, or his representative.

9. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall

furring or within drywall partitions, or installed within hung ceilings.

10. SUBMIT means submit to Architect for review.

11. SUBSTITUTION means a product meeting all requirements and specifications and

having been approved by the engineer to replace another product specifically identified

herein.





12. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM means the location of a floor-serving facility for

housing telecommunication equipment, cable terminations, and cross-connect wiring.

This room is recognized in ANSI/TIA-569 as the transition point between the horizontal

(station) pathway facilities and the backbone (riser) pathway facilities.

13. WET LOCATION means a pathway that does not protect cables from moisture levels

that are beyond the intended operating range of “inside” premises cable.

a. For example: Slab-on-grade construction where pathways are installed

underground or in concrete slabs that are in direct contact with soil (e.g., sand and

gravel) is considered a “wet location.”

b. Also refer to the:

1) NEC Article 100 for definitions of Location, Damp; Location, Dry; and

Location, Wet.

2) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) for definitions

of Wet locations.

14. (*) – Where appearing in part or model numbers; shall represent wild card character to be

filled in by the contractor to meet required specifications.

B. The terms "approved equal", “equivalent”, or "equal" are used synonymously and shall mean

“accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified”.

C. The term "approved" shall mean labeled, listed, or both, by an NRTL, and acceptable to the

AHJ over this project.

D. The following definitions apply to excavation operations:

1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached indicated sub-grade elevations, if

unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing

materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract

Modification.

2. Sub-base: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement

systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material.

3. Sub-grade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the

slab or pavement system.

4. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade

elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect.

E. The following definitions apply to OSP Pathway operations:

1. Duct: Conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used underground

embedded in earth or concrete.

2. Duct Bank: Two or more ducts installed underground in the same trench or concrete

envelope.

3. Handhole: An underground pathway space providing above-grade hand access into the

ducts/duct banks for cable placement.





1.5 CODES, REFERENCES, AND STANDARDS

A. Execute all Work in accordance with, and comply at a minimum with, National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) codes, state and local building codes, and all other applicable codes and

ordinances in force, governing the particular class of Work involved, for performance,

workmanship, equipment, and materials. Additionally, comply with rules and regulations of

public utilities and municipal departments affected by connection of services. Where conflicts

between various codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations exist, comply with the most stringent.

Wherever requirements of these Specifications, Drawings, or both, exceed those of the above

items, the requirements of these Specifications, Drawings, or both, shall govern. Code

compliance, at a minimum, is mandatory. Construe nothing in these Construction Documents as

permitting work not in compliance, at a minimum, with these codes. Bring all conflicts

observed between codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and these documents to the Architect’s

and Engineer’s attention in sufficient time, prior to the opening of Bids, to prepare the

Supplementary Drawings and Specifications Addenda required to resolve the conflict.

B. If the conflict is not reported timely, prior to the opening of bids, resolve the conflict and

provide the installation in accordance with the governing codes and to the satisfaction of the

Architect and Engineer, without additional compensation. Contractor will be held responsible

for any violation of the law.

C. Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities having jurisdiction; and, upon final

completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of

acceptance from these authorities having jurisdiction.

D. All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, methods of installation and test

procedures shall conform to industry standards, acts, and codes, including, but not limited to the

following, except where these Drawings and Specifications exceed them:

E. The references to the following codes, references and standards represent the most current and

up-to-date revisions or printing as of the issue of this document including all sections, parts and

their addenda. The Contractor is responsible for following the correct revision or printing

(UON):

1. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):

a. ANSI/TIA-568 –C.1 - “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard Part 1: General Requirements.”

b. ANSI/TIA-568 –C.2 - “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.”

c. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 - “Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.”

d. ANSI/TIA-569-B - “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces.”

e. ANSI/TIA-598-C - “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.”

f. TIA-526-7 - “Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber

Cable Plant.”

g. TIA-526-14 - “Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber

Cable Plant.”

h. TIA TSB 140 - “Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity

of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems.”





i. ANSI/TIA-606-A - “Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure.”

j. J-STD-607-A - “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications.”

k. ANSI/TIA-758 – “Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling

Standard.”

2. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM E 814 – Fore Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. UL 1479 – Fire Tests of Through-Penetrations Fire Stops.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).

5. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA); Accessibility Guidelines.

6. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Chapter XVII, Part 1910 (OSHA) Federal

Communications Commission (FCC).Part 76, sub-part K.

7. All local, state, and federal codes.

1.6 GUIDELINES

A. The references to the following guidelines represent the most current and up-to-date revisions or

printing as of the issue of this document including all sections, parts and their addenda. The

Contractor is responsible for following the correct revision or printing (UON).

1. BICSI Installation Manual.

2. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.

3. BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual.

4. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual.


A. Execute all Work under this Division in a thorough and professional manner by competent and

experienced workmen duly trained to perform the Work specified.

B. Install all Work in strict conformance with all manufacturers' requirements and

recommendations, unless these Documents exceed those requirements. Install all equipment and

materials in a neat and professional manner, aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory

operation, in accordance with BICSI guidelines.

C. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide all material and equipment new, of the

best quality and design, free from defects and imperfections and with markings or a nameplate





identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, size and

capacity. Provide all material and equipment of the same type from the same manufacturer.

D. Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items of the same types specified within this Division

shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation, or repair for not less than

one year prior to date of bidding for this Project.

E. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority or

authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the service providers

serving the project and the Owner’s insurance underwriter.

F. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where requirements

differ, the most stringent apply.

G. Should any change in drawings or specifications be required to comply with governing

regulations, notify the General Contractor immediately.

H. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of ADA, ANSI,

ASTM, IEEE, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, and the Corps of Engineers.

I. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough, substantial,

workmanlike manner by competent workmen.

1.8 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation the

Telecommunications Infrastructure systems as called for in the Contract Documents, and in

accordance with applicable codes and regulations.

B. Provide labor, materials, and accessories required to provide complete, operating

Telecommunications Infrastructure systems. Labor, materials or accessories not specifically

called for in the Contract Documents, but required to provide complete, operating infrastructure

systems shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. The work includes, but is not

necessarily limited to, the following:

1. All station cabling between the Telecommunications rooms and the outlets.

2. All backbone cabling, including cabling between the Telecommunications Entrance

Facility Room and the Telecommunications rooms and designated Telecommunications

equipment rooms.

3. All termination blocks, outlets/jacks, patch panels, patch cords, cabinets, equipment

racks, etc., required to support, terminate and/or cross connect cabling at the main cross-

connect, Telecommunication rooms and/or other designated equipment locations.

a. All efforts with respect to incoming OSP cabling shall be coordinated with the

customer's designated IT Staff point-of-contact and the customer's preferred

service provider/s. This coordination shall include but not be limited to backbone

cabling installs, primary protectors installs, terminations for outside plant telecom

utility cabling and the associated testing/commissioning.





4. All physical cable management hardware including, but not limited to: cable trays,

conduits, open-top-based hooks (i.e. J-Hooks, L-Hooks) ladder-type cable racks within

telecommunication rooms and “D-rings” on backboards and equipment racks/vertical and

horizontal cable managers/cabinets/frames.

5. A Grounding/Bonding System, as described in these construction documents.

6. Termination, cross connect and patching of all cable pairs as indicated herein or on

schedules or on drawings.

7. Testing, labeling and documentation of all cables and hardware installed under this

contract.

8. Preparation and submission of shop drawings, testing reports, as-built drawings, and

cabling documentation as described below.

9. Fire stopping as required by these construction documents and the AHJ.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation with all other trades. Refer to section 230500 ‘Common

Work Results for HVAC’, paragraphs 1.3 and 1.4 for specific requirements regarding

coordination procedures required.

B. The Contractor shall plan for time for coordination with commissioning agent. Refer to sections

019113, 019114, 019116 for General and Communications Commissioning requirements.

C. Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered in installing the Work under this

Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or commencing

work, and make due provisions for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this requirement

shall not be considered justification for omission, alteration, and incorrect or faulty installation

of any of the Work under this Division or for additional compensation for any Work covered by

this Division.

D. Refer to Telecommunications Drawings and Divisions of the other trades and to relevant

equipment drawings and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. Follow these

drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other trades will permit. Provide

all offsets, fittings, and accessories, required to clear equipment, beams and other structural

members which may be required but not shown on the Drawings.

E. Provide materials with trim that will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes

actually installed.

F. Carry on the Work in such a manner that the Work of the other trades will not be handicapped,

hindered, or delayed at any time.

G. The locations of cable termination fields, outlets, patch panels, equipment racks and other

equipment indicated on the Drawings are approximately correct, but they are understood to be

subject to such revision as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed

in consequence of increase or reduction of the number of outlets, or in order to meet field

conditions, or to coordinate with modular requirements of ceilings, or to simplify the work, or

for other legitimate causes.

Delta #5





H. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of outlets, patch panels, control panels,

switches, etc., and have precise and definite locations accepted by the Architect before

proceeding with the installation.

I. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of outlets, patch panels, control panels,

switches, etc., and have precise and definite locations accepted by the Architect before

proceeding with the installation.

1. The Drawings show only the general run of raceways and approximate locations of

outlets. Any significant changes in location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in order to

meet field conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect for

review before such alterations are made.

2. Installer shall identify all cable runs that require more than (2) two 90-degree bends or

any one bend that exceeds 90-degrees prior to the placement of the pathway.

J. Verify with the Architect the exact location and mounting height of outlets and equipment not

dimensionally located on the Drawings.

K. Outlet/cable tags in the form of alpha/numeric characters are used where shown to indicate the

outlet and cable designation numbers in cable termination fields (terminal blocks and/or patch

panels. Show the actual outlet/cable numbers on the as-built Record Drawings, on the

associated typed termination field labels and in the printed and computer readable cabling

schedules. Where sample outlet/cable-numbering information is not indicated, request

clarification from the Architect.

L. The drawings generally do not indicate the number of cables in conduit, or the actual identity of

cables in specific conduits, cable tray or other cabling pathways. Provide the correct cable type

and quantity as required by the indicated outlets, cable schedules, the design intent of any

example drawings or schedules, referenced wiring diagrams (if any), the maximum distance

limitations, and the applicable requirements of the NEC and ANSI/TIA-568.

M. Carefully check space requirements with other trades to insure that equipment can be installed

in the spaces allotted.

N. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure

that they have the information necessary so that they may properly install the necessary

connections and equipment. Identify items (Cable Trays, Fire stopping systems, pull boxes, etc.)

requiring access in order that the Ceiling Trade will know where to install access doors and

panels.

O. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of Telecommunications risers through structural masonry

and concrete walls as required for the proper protection of each Telecommunications riser

passing through building surfaces.

P. Provide UL listed fire stop system around all conduits, cable trays, sleeves, etc. which pass

through rated walls and partitions.

Q. Provide fire stopping around all cables within conduits, cable trays, sleeves, etc. as required in

accordance with the specific fire stop system(s) being installed.





R. Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in pre-cast members for

Telecommunications work.

S. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit and equipment, designed so as not to exceed

allowable loadings of structures.

T. Examine and compare the Contract Drawings and Specifications with the Drawings and

specifications of other trades, and report any discrepancies between them to the General

Contractor and obtain written instructions for changes necessary in the work. Install and

coordinate the work in cooperation with other related trades. Before installation, make proper

provisions to avoid interferences.

U. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to

coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on

the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Architect for

review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of Record Drawings.

V. Coordinate with the Joplin School District Technical / IT point of contact and/or the local

Service Provider Company or Companies as to their requirements for service connections and

provide all necessary grounding, materials, equipment, labor, testing, and appurtenances.

W. Before commencing work, examine adjoining work on which this work is in any way affected

and report conditions, which prevent performance of the work. Become thoroughly familiar

with actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed

or altered.

X. Adjust location of conduits, terminal blocks, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work to

prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location

of each conduit prior to fabrication.

1. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not

pitch. For example: condensate, steam, and plumbing drains normally have right-of-way.

Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right-of- way over lines whose elevations

can be changed.

2. Provide offsets, transitions and changes in direction of conduit as required to maintain

proper headroom and pitch on sloping lines (Note: Requirements for pull boxes will still

apply).

Y. In cases of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of need for explanation, request

supplementary instructions from the General Contractor.

1.10 MEASUREMENTS AND LAYOUTS

A. The Drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems

approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of

the Work. Figured dimensions take precedence to scaled dimensions. Determine exact locations

by job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing all

Contract Documents. Correct, at no additional costs to the Owner, errors that could have been

avoided by proper checking and inspection.





1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow submittal requirements from Division 1.

B. Unless noted otherwise within each individual section, submittals shall be provided for approval

in four distinct phases.

1. “Pre-construction”

a. Generally means, UON, submittals required prior to starting construction, such as:

1) Warranty information from manufacturer of structured cabling system

materials which depicts the minimum 15 year component / performance

warranty.

a) Provide within 1 week of project award a list of installers who are

certified by the manufacturer of the structured cabling system

materials to perform the installation, termination and testing of the

structured cabling system materials associated with the project.

2) A typed list, indexed by Specification section, of products specifically

identified by part number (no wild card characters) within each specification

section in this Division.

3) For all items not identified by a specific part number or which has been

listed with any wild card characters shall be provided in the form of

manufacturers’ cut-sheets:

a) At a minimum all cut-sheets shall contain the following:

i) Cross-reference to the specification section and/or drawings for

which the product is to be reviewed for compliance and

acceptance.

ii) Every product cut-sheet submitted for review shall contain the

manufacturers’ name and logo somewhere on the page.

iii) All parts, pieces, and equipment submitted for review shall be

identified specifically by stamp, or highlighted in such a manner

that the product(s) being considered are clearly identifiable and

distinguished from all other materials, parts or equipment that

may be on the submittal.

iv) For cut-sheets with accessories, additional parts, or derivations

of the product being submitted all shall be clearly identified for

the reviewer and acceptance.

v) Sufficient detail for reviewer to identify all required

information, such as size, weight, color, NRTL listings,

approval or certification information, and other necessary

identifying information to confirm product meets specifications.

4) Shop Drawings.

5) Manufacturer’s testing reports.

6) And as required by individual sections in this Division.





2. “Project Completion”

a. Generally means, UON, submittals required after the substantial completion but

prior to final approval for completion, such as:

1) As-builts indicating project is installed in compliance industry standards and

the contract documents.

2) Project test reports.

3) Cable Databases (as applicable).

4) Warranty Certificate from Manufacturer of Structured Cabling System

Materials.

5) Lead Installer / Project manager letter with signature stating the project has

been installed in accordance with referenced industry standards and contract

documents.

6) And as required by individual sections in this Division.

C. All submittals at each phase shall be submitted together and in one package. “Piecemeal”

submissions will not be reviewed.

D. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data sheets, samples, and test reports as

specified:

1. Shop Drawings: See sub-paragraph S, below.

2. Samples as requested shall be physical examples that represent materials, equipment or

workmanship and establish standards by which the work will be judged. Samples will not

be returned to the Contractor.

3. Test Reports:

a. Pre-Installation Testing Reports: Submit two sets of manufacturers' or field-testing

reports for those materials identified in the individual system Specification

Sections as requiring that such reports be submitted.

b. Post-Installation Testing Reports: See Specification Sections in Division 27.

E. For all warranties required under this division and supplemental to Division 1 requirements

submit no fewer than 6 copies of the following documents to indicate the required warranty

terms and coverage’s:

1. Warranty terms and conditions must contain the following:

a. Length of warranty period.

b. Applications covered (future and present).

c. Single manufacturer responsible for fulfilling warranty.

d. Who is covered.

e. What is covered.

f. All disclaimers, limitations, etc.

g. What, if anything, is not covered.

F. Documentation supporting the proposed structured cabling warranty and all terms and

conditions in accordance with the requirements set forth herein shall be submitted in writing. In

addition to this warranty documentation, all certifications (individual and company) as required





by guarantor of said warranty shall be submitted. These certifications shall only include those

persons with direct association with this project and includes the expiration date and full name

of each individual for which the certification is issued.

G. Within two weeks after notice to proceed, prepare an index of all submittals for the project.

Include a submittal identification number, a cross-reference to the Specification sections or

Drawing number, and an item description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the

Specification sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal

identification number in addition to the other data specified. All subcontractors shall utilize the

assigned submittal identification number.

1. Submittals may be presented in a tab separated binder with tabs indicating specification

sections referenced back to this index. If a tab separated binder is not provided each page

must be identified with the specification section for which the submittal is being

provided. For submittals encompassing more than one specification section each section

applicable must be identified on each submittal page. Failure to identify each submittal

with the appropriate specification section will cause the submittal to be rejected and not

reviewed.

H. Obtain complete shop drawings, product data and samples from the manufacturers, suppliers,

vendors, and all subcontractors, for all materials and equipment as specified. Submit data and

details of such materials and equipment for review. Prior to submission, certify that the shop

drawings, product data and samples are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Check all

materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the

Contract Documents. Modify any work, which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop

drawings as required to comply with the Contract Documents and the shop drawings.

I. Assemble and submit for review, manufacturers’ product literature for material and equipment

to be furnished, installed, or both, under this Division, including shop drawings, manufacturers’

product data and performance sheets, samples, and other submittals required by this Division.

Provide the number of submittals required by Division 1; however, at a minimum, submit six

(6) sets.

J. Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or circling) to show

applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed.

Cross out non-applicable information. Note specified features such as materials or paint finish.

K. Provide submittals in sufficient detail so as to demonstrate compliance with these Contract

Documents and the design concept.

L. Refer to individual Sections of these Specifications for any additional submittal requirements.

M. Transmit submittals as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow for two weeks

Engineer review time, plus to/from mailing time via the General Contractor, plus a duplication

of this time for resubmittals, if required. Transmit submittals as soon as possible after Notice to

Proceed and before construction starts.

N. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the shop drawings and

samples for that portion of the work have been submitted and accepted.





O. Before transmitting submittals and material lists, verify that the equipment submitted is

mutually compatible with and suitable for the intended use. Verify that the equipment will fit

the available space and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of equipment furnished

makes necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the

proposed layout.

P. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be

contained on submissions, or for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

The noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to

proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, product data

and samples, the Contract Documents govern the work and are neither waived nor superseded in

any way by the review of shop drawings, product data and samples.

Q. Submittals shall contain the following information. Submittals not so identified will be returned

to the Contractor without action:

1. The project name.

2. The applicable Specification Section and paragraph.

3. The submittal date.

4. The Contractor's stamp, which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked

by the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications, and have been

coordinated with other trades.

R. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation and technical data sufficient to verify

that equipment meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. Include wiring, piping and

service connection data.

S. For each room or area of the building containing Telecommunications Infrastructure equipment,

submit the following as part of the shop-drawings and as-builts:

1. Floor plans, at not less than 1/8" scale, showing routing of Telecommunications conduits

larger than trade size 1-1/4", cable trays and wireways, including surface-mounted

raceways.

2. Riser diagrams showing types, quantities and schematic routing of all

Telecommunications backbone pathways, cabling and the TBB.

3. Enlarged plan views and elevation layout drawings for the Telecommunications Entrance

Facility Room, Telecommunications Rooms and all other designated

Telecommunications Equipment Rooms indicating the equipment in the exact location in

which it is intended to be installed. These plans shall be of a scale not less than ¼ inch =

1’-0”. They shall be prepared in the following manner:

a. Indicate the physical boundaries of the space including door swings and ceiling

heights and ceiling types (as applicable).

b. Illustrate all Telecommunications equipment proposed to be contained therein,

including the placement of fire stop assemblies. Include top and bottom elevations

of all Telecommunications equipment. The Drawings shall be prepared utilizing

the dimensions contained in the individual equipment submittals. Indicate code and

manufacturer’s required clearances.

c. Illustrate all other equipment therein such as conduits, detectors, lighting fixtures,

ducts, registers, pull boxes, wireways, structural elements, etc.





d. Indicate the operating weight of each piece of known equipment.

e. Illustrate concrete pads, curbs, etc.

f. Indicate dimensions to confirm compliance with code-required clearances.

g. Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for each piece of

equipment (as per each respective manufacturer’s recommendation).

h. Equipment removal routes for individual equipment items with plan dimensions

exceeding 24" by 36" or height exceeding 84".

T. The Engineer’s checking and subsequent acceptance of such submittals shall not relieve the

Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in

writing, called the Engineer’s and Architect’s attention to such deviations at the time of

submission, and secured written acceptance; nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for

errors in dimensions, details, sizes of members, or quantities; or for omissions of components or

fittings; or for not coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work.

U. The work described in shop drawing submissions shall be carefully checked by all trades for

clearances (including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions,

maintenance of architectural conditions and coordination with other trades on the job. Each

submitted shop drawing shall include a certification that related job conditions have been

checked by the Contractor and each Subcontractor and that conflicts do not exist.

V. Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data on site.

W. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data and/or samples will not be reviewed and

will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal.

X. The Telecommunications room layout submittals and the related Telecommunications

equipment submittals shall be submitted concurrently. Failure to submit concurrently may result

in the immediate return of the submittal marked REVISE AND RESUBMIT.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Submit data prior to requesting the final punch list and before all requests for Substantial

Completion.

C. Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown

procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under

this Division.

D. Prior to Substantial Completion of the project, furnish to the General Contractor, for Engineer’s

review, and for the Owner’s use, four (4) copies of brochures in three-ring, loose-leaf, hard-

back notebook form, divided and tabbed, containing equipment data, approved submittals, shop

drawings, diagrams, capacities, spare part numbers, manufacturer’s service and maintenance

data, warranties, guarantees, etc. Include local contacts complete with address and telephone

number, for equipment, apparatus, and system components furnished and installed under this

Division of the specifications.





1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Keep a set of jobsite work prints of the Issued for Construction Drawings on the jobsite during

construction, for the purpose of annotating changes. During the course of construction, indicate

on these Documents, changes made from the Conformed Contract Documents. Pay particular

attention to those items that require locating for servicing.

B. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Record Drawings.

C. At the completion of the project, obtain reproducible bond copies of the final Drawings and

incorporate changes noted on the jobsite work prints onto these drawings. These changes shall

be done by a skilled drafter. Mark each sheet "Record Drawing", along with the date, and

deliver these Record Drawings to the General Contractor.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling.

B. Deliver equipment and material to the job site in their original containers with labels intact,

fully identified with manufacturer's name, make, model, model number, type, size, capacity and

Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels and other pertinent information necessary to identify the

item.

C. Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area

and in such a manner as to prevent equipment and materials from damage and loss. Store

equipment and materials delivered to the site on pallets and cover with waterproof, tear resistant

tarp or plastic or as required to keep equipment and materials dry. Follow manufacturer's

recommendations, and at all times, take every precaution to properly protect equipment and

material from damage, including the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect

equipment and material stored at the Site. Equipment and/or material which becomes rusted or

damaged shall be replaced or restored by the Contractor to a condition acceptable to the

Architect and Engineer.

D. Be responsible for the safe storage of tools, material and equipment.

1.15 WARRANTIES

A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Warranties.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual.

C. Warrant each system and each element thereof against all defects due to faulty workmanship,

design or material for a period of 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, unless

specific items are required to carry a longer warranty in these Construction Documents or

manufacturer’s standard warranty exceeds 12 months. Remedy all defects, occurring within the

warranty period(s), as stated in the General Conditions and Division 1.





D. All components, including but not limited to, connectors, terminal blocks, cabling and all other

components considered to be a part of what is commonly referred to as an end-to-end solution

for all backbone and horizontal cabling systems, shall be warranted for a minimum period of 15

years from the date of installation against defects in materials, equipment and workmanship.

This warranty shall also include the performance of these systems. This warranty shall include

transmission requirements as specified in applicable ANSI/TIA/IEC/ISO standards for each

cable system specified. This warranty shall also include all current and future applications

designed for and becomes available under warranty for each cable system.

1. Warranty must be guaranteed by a single reputable manufacturer: Leviton / Superior

Essex.

2. Other manufacturers are conditionally approved, provided contractor submits

corresponding part numbers from a single manufacturer below:

a. Corning for fiber.

b. Commscope / Uniprise for U/UTP CAT 6.

c. Cablofil (raceway components).

d. Chatsworth (raceway components).

E. The above warranties shall include labor and material. Make repairs or replacements without

any additional costs to the Owner.

F. Perform the remedial work promptly, upon written notice from the General Contractor,

Architect or Owner.

G. At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner all warranties, in writing and

properly executed, including term limits for warranties extending beyond the one year period,

each warranty instrument being addressed to the Owner and stating the commencement date and

term.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Use only products listed for their intended use by a NRTL, except products for which no

relevant standards exist.

B. Where products are required to be NRTL listed, classified, approved or otherwise each

individual item shall bear the NRTL mark by permanent means.

C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and

corrosion.

D. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, or any other material, which is

considered hazardous by the Department of Environmental Protection or any other authority

having jurisdiction.





E. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as

directed by the Architect.

F. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer’s name, model

number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous

place.

G. Install materials and equipment with qualified trade people.

H. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar applications and sizes.

I. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment. Provide

a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation.

J. Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance and attendance by the

Owner’s representative is required to witness such tests, associated travel costs and subsistence

shall be paid for by the Contractor.

K. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site operating conditions.

Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be de-rated with the method of de-rating identified on the

submittals.

L. Enclosures for Telecommunications Infrastructure equipment installed in mechanical equipment

rooms shall be NEMA type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for Telecommunications Infrastructure

equipment installed outdoors shall be NEMA type 3R.

M. If products and materials are specified or indicated on the drawings for a specific item or

system, use those products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in either of the

above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of product data submittal.

N. Ship and store all products and materials in a manner that will protect them from damage,

weather and entry of debris. If items are damaged, do not install, but take immediate steps to

obtain a replacement. Repairs of damaged goods will only be permitted with prior written

permission of the Owner/Engineer.

O. Part numbers and product codes in these specifications are correct as of the time of writing.

Manufacturers may, however, change part numbers and product codes on short notice. In cases

where part numbers or product codes differ from technical specifications for a particular

product, provide products meeting the minimum technical specifications of the products in the

specifications. Notify the General Contractor, Architect and Engineer of any product code and

or part number changes on the material list submittal.

P. Product Consistency: Any given item of equipment or material shall be the product of one

manufacturer throughout the facility. Multiple manufacturers of any one item will not be

permitted, unless specifically noted otherwise. In particular, the glass used in the construction of

the fiber optic cables, the same manufacturer shall make pigtails and patch cords.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FEES AND PERMITS

A. Secure and Pay all required fees and obtain all required permits related to the

Telecommunications Infrastructure installation. Arrange with the various service provider

companies for the installation and connection of all required services to this facility and pay all

charges associated therewith including connection charges and inspection fees, except where

these services or fees are designated to be provided by others.

B. Pay royalties or fees in connection with the use of patented devices and systems.

3.2 EXISTING SERVICES

A. Existing Telecommunications Infrastructure services not specifically indicated to be removed or

altered shall remain as they presently exist.

B. Where existing services interfere with new construction, alter or reroute such existing

equipment to facilitate new construction after obtaining written permission from the Architect.

Notify in writing giving two weeks advance notice or planned alteration prior to altering any

existing condition is required.

C. Schedule and coordinate with the Utility Company, Owner and with the Architect all

connections to, relocation of, or discontinuation of normal services from any existing service

provider line. Include all premium time required for all such work in the Bid.

D. Preserve continuity of service of existing facilities (related to damage or alteration due to new

construction). Unauthorized alteration to existing equipment shall be corrected without

additional cost to the Owner.

E. Repair all existing utilities damaged due to construction operations to the satisfaction of the

Owner or Utility Company without additional cost.

F. Do not leave utilities disconnected at the end of a workday or over a weekend unless authorized

by representatives of the Owner, General Contractor or Architect.

G. Make repairs and restoration of utilities before workmen leave the project at the end of the

workday in which the interruption takes place.

3.3 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Locate all pull boxes, junction boxes and fire stopping systems so as to provide easy access for

operation, service inspection and maintenance. Provide an access door where equipment or

devices are located above inaccessible ceilings.

B. Maintain all code required clearances and clearances required by manufacturers.





3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other

surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other

equipment, layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping,

equipment or defaced finished plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc. using skilled tradespeople of

the trades required at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Do not cut, channel, chase or drill masonry, tile, etc., unless permission from the Architect is

obtained. If permission is granted, perform this work in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

C. Patch around all openings to match adjacent construction.

D. Where conduit or equipment is mounted on a painted finished surface, or a surface to be

painted, paint to match the surface. Cold galvanize bare metal whenever support channels are

cut.

E. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as

required. Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to accommodate

penetrations at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. After the final waterproofing membrane has been installed, roofs may be cut only with written

permission by the Architect.

3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mounting heights shall conform to ADA requirements.

B. Mounting heights shall be from floor to center of device, unless otherwise noted. Verify exact

locations and mounting heights with the Architect before installation.

C. Wall mounted devices requiring operational access shall be mounted a minimum of 15 inches

above finished floor to bottom of device and a maximum of 48 inches above finished floor to

top of device.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Refer to Specifications regarding “Painting” for painting requirements.

B. Paint exposed ferrous surfaces, including, but not limited to, hangers, equipment stands and

supports using materials and methods as specified under individual Sections of the

Specifications; colors shall be as selected by the Architect.

C. Re-finish all field-threaded ends of galvanized conduits and field-cut ends of galvanized

supports with a cold-galvanizing compound approved for use on conductive surfaces. Follow

closely manufacturer’s instructions for pre-cleaning surfaces and application.





D. Factory finishes and shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment

Specification sections.

E. Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified, touch-up or

refinish, as required by, and to the acceptance of, the Architect and Engineer, marred or

damaged surfaces so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish. If, in the opinion of the Architect or

Engineer, the finish is too badly damaged to be properly re-finished, replace the damaged

equipment or materials at no additional costs to the Owner.

F. Provide touch-up paint as required by Specification Sections in this Division.

G. Ensure paint is not applied to:

1. Structured cabling materials pathways located in a visible space such as the

Telecommunications Room or Entrance Facility.

2. Any structured cabling throughout the facility.

3. Any connector located throughout the facility.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, loose materials, crates, etc., resulting from the installation

of this work. Remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and keep the premises

clean and free of dust and debris.

B. Immediately prior to final inspection, make a final cleanup of dirt and refuse resulting from

Work and assist in making the premises vacuum clean. Clean all material and equipment

installed under this Division.

C. Clean all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project. Wipe clean exposed lighting

fixture reflectors and trim pieces with a non-abrasive cloth just prior to occupancy.

D. Remove dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter from all surfaces.

E. Touch up and restore damaged finishes to their original condition.

F. All Telecommunications Infrastructure equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed and wiped

clean prior to energization and at the completion of the project. Equipment shall be opened for

observation by the Architect as required.

3.8 WATERPROOFING

A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room

floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, make penetration prior to

the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required. Advise the Architect and

obtain written permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such

penetration is shown on the Drawings.





B. Restore waterproofing integrity of walls or surfaces after they have been penetrated without

additional cost to the Owner.

3.9 SUPPORTS

A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers, auxiliary

structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work.

B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated

as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In

particular, provide such frames or racks in telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms.

C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment, which is installed in a freestanding position.

D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support

system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a

substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all

equipment mounted on them.

E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall not

depend on electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support.

F. Telecommunications equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling

media (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the

ceiling). Provide independent support of Telecommunications equipment. Do not attach to

supports provided for ductwork, piping or work of other trades.

G. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, equipment, etc., so that loading will not

exceed allowable loadings of structure. Telecommunications equipment and supports shall not

come in contact with work of other trades.

3.10 FASTENINGS

A. Fasten equipment to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice.

B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 pounds or less, conform to the following

as a minimum:

1. Wood: Wood screws.

2. Concrete and solid masonry: Bolts and expansion shields.

3. Hollow construction: Toggle bolts.

4. Solid metal: Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs.

5. Steel decking or sub-floor: Fastenings as specified below for applied weights in excess of

100 pounds.

C. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 100 pounds, but is 300 pounds or

less, conform to the following as a minimum:





1. At concrete slabs provide 24 inch x 24 inch x ½ inch steel fishplates on top with through

bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top of slab

screed line, where no fill is to be applied.

2. At steel decking or sub-floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts or threaded rods.

The tops of bolts or rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and

grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the

decking or sub-floor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking

or sub-floor such hangers shall be provided.

D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 300 pounds, coordinate with and

obtain the approval of Architect and conform to the following as a minimum:

1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel

elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably welded or

clamped to building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.

E. For items, which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the

building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle

iron bridging tying to the building structural elements.

F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or

arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars.

Prefabricated steel channels as manufactured by Kindorf or Unistrut are acceptable.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Specification Section 27 05 53 – “Identification for Communications Systems” for

general Telecommunications equipment identification requirements.

B. See individual sections for any additional identification requirements.

C. Required UL labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically required under the

various technical sections of the Specifications be removed.

3.12 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING

A. Provide drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment

specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and installation of equipment as required by

the construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time that it is

required, and provide proper storage and protection until the time it is required. Pay for all costs

of demurrage or storage.

B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by the

project construction schedule, then Contractor shall be responsible for resulting disassembly, re-

assembly, manufacturer’s supervision, shoring, general construction modification, delays,

overtime costs, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner.





3.13 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION

A. Protect the work, equipment, and material of other trades from damage by work or workmen of

this trade, and correct damaged caused without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Take responsibility for work, materials, and equipment until finally inspected, tested and

accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage, and carefully store material and

equipment received on site, which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with

temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. Cover

and protect equipment and materials from damage due to water, spray-on fireproofing,

construction debris, etc. Store equipment to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces.

C. Provide adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of materials and equipment against

damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work until final acceptance. Protect

materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished

surfaces will be damaged or marred, and moving parts are kept clean and dry. Do not install

damaged items; take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair.

3.14 ADJUSTING, ALIGNING AND TESTING

A. Adjust, align and test all Telecommunications equipment furnished and/or installed under this

Division.

B. Check and test protective devices for specified and required application, and adjust as required.

C. Verify that completed wiring system is free from short circuits, unintentional grounds, low

insulation impedances, and unintentional open circuits.

D. Notify the General Contractor and/or Architect immediately of all operational failures caused by

defective material, labor or both.

E. Refer to individual Sections for additional and specific requirements.

3.15 START-UP OF SYSTEMS

A. Prior to start-up of Telecommunications systems, check all components and devices, to confirm

compliance with manufacturers’ recommended installation procedures.

B. Demonstrate that all equipment and systems perform properly as designed per Drawings and

Specifications.

3.16 TEST REPORTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE SYSTEMS

A. Perform tests as required by these Specifications and submit the results. The tests shall establish

the adequacy, quality, safety, and reliability for each Telecommunications system installed. See

individual sections, particularly in Division 27, for extent of testing required. Notify the General

Contractor, Architect and Engineer two working days prior to each test.





B. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and acceptance

testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit the

execution of the testing prior to occupancy and Contract closeout. Complete any adjustments

and/or alterations, which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper

functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date.

C. For specific testing requirements of special systems, refer to the Specification section that

describes that system.

D. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed and

outlining when field-testing will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review within

six months after the notice to proceed. Update this schedule periodically as the project

progresses.

E. Upon completing each test, record the results, date and time of each test and the conditions

under which the test was conducted. Submit to the General Contractor and Architect, for

Engineer’s review, in duplicate. Supply all test results required by Division 27 specifications.

F. Promptly correct all failures or deficiencies revealed by these tests as determined by the

Engineer.

3.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals for active equipment furnished under this

Division.

B. Submit three final copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for review at least ten weeks

before the completion date. Assemble data in a completely indexed volume or volumes in three-

ring binders and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. Print the project

name on the outside of the binders.

C. Maintenance manuals shall include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in a clear

and easily understandable format. Show model numbers of each piece of equipment, complete

lists of replacement parts, capacity ratings, and actual loads.

D. Provide the following information where applicable:

1. Identifying name and mark number.

2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list).

3. Certified Record Drawings and Final Reviewed submittals.

4. Parts list.

5. Wiring diagrams.

6. Manufacturer’s recommended operating and maintenance instructions with all non-

applicable information deleted.

7. List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements.

8. Test reports.

a. Format to be a CD with a summary of the tests shown in an Microsoft Excel

format.





1) Summary should be in alphabetical order and depict.

a) Name of drop location.

b) Date test was performed.

c) Result of test (pass / fail).

b. Full test results to be provided on a separate CD in the same format as the

summary.

9. Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable.

3.18 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION REVIEW

A. Prior to requesting a site observation for "CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIAL

COMPLETION", complete the following items:

1. Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Data.

2. Submit complete Record Drawings.

3. Perform all required training of Owner’s personnel.

4. Turn over all spares and extra materials to the Owner, along with a complete inventory of

spares and extra materials being turned over.

5. Perform start-up tests of all systems.

6. Remove all temporary facilities from the site.

7. Comply with all requirements for Substantial Completion in the Division 1 and General

Conditions.

B. Request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. Give the General Contractor and

Architect at least seven (7) days notice prior to the review.

C. State in the written request that the Contractor has complied with the requirements for

Substantial Completion.

D. Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect will either proceed with the review or advise

the Contractor of unfilled requirements.

E. If the Contractor requests a site visit for Substantial Completion review prior to completing the

above-mentioned items, then provide reimbursement to the Architect and Engineer for time and

expenses incurred for the visit.

F. Upon completion of the review, the Architect and Engineer will prepare a “final list” of

outstanding items to be completed or corrected for final acceptance.

G. Omissions on the “final list” shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the

Contract Documents.

H. Prior to requesting a final review, submit a copy of the final list of items to be completed or

corrected. State in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for acceptance or the

reason it has not been completed.





3.19 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain on a daily basis at the project site a complete set of Record Drawings, reflecting an

accurate dimensional record of deviations between work shown on Drawings and that actually

installed.

B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed; suitably identify

locations of all equipment by at least two dimensions to permanent structures. In addition, mark

the Record Drawings to show the precise location of concealed work and equipment, including

concealed or embedded raceways and cables and all changes and deviations in the

Telecommunications Infrastructure work form that shown on the Contract Documents. This

requirement shall not be constructed as authorization to make changes in the layout or work.

C. Upon completion of the installation obtain from the Architect, a complete set of bond drawings

with professional’s seal and firm name removed. In a neat and accurate manner, provide a

complete record of all revisions of the original drawings, as actually installed. The cost for

transparencies and for making required changes shall be included in the Contract. Submit one

set of black line prints of these revised transparencies for review. After review, make necessary

changes to transparencies and then deliver them to the Owner. The Record Drawings shall not

be reviewed for accuracy nor will the Engineer assume any responsibility for accuracy of

completeness.

D. Submit the as-built Telecommunications cabling schedules in three (3) final printed copies and

on a CD or DVD as comma delimited ASCII format files (or other mutually acceptable media

and format).

3.20 FINAL PUNCHLIST

A. Prior to the Final Punchlist, certify that systems and equipment are complete, operational, and

are in compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. During the Final Punchlist, provide personnel with access keys, hand held radios, and necessary

expertise to operate each system and piece of equipment to demonstrate operational compliance

with the Contract Documents.

C. Any deficiencies noted on the Final Punchlist shall be expeditiously corrected and certified in

writing.

3.21 EARLY OCCUPANCY

A. Complete those systems, which are necessary to allow partial early occupancy of the building.

B. Verify and comply with requirements for temporary occupancy with the local Building and Fire

Departments.





3.22 ACCEPTANCE

A. Perform all tests required by local authorities, in addition to tests specified herein.

B. Provide a minimum of 2 technicians on-site for each major systems cutover. Technicians shall

be ready with all necessary tools, test equipment, and supplies necessary to troubleshoot and

correct cabling system faults.

C. Upon receipt of the Contractor’s documentation of cable testing, the Owner will review/observe

the installation and randomly request tests of the cables/wires installed. Once all cables required

by these construction documents have been tested and pass in accordance with sections in

Division 27 and the Owner is satisfied that all work is in accordance with the Contract

Documents, the Owner will notify the Contractor in writing that the work has been accepted.

3.23 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Delivery to Owner’s representative 2 complete sets of all special tools and small equipment

items needed for proper operation, adjustment and maintenance of cabling and equipment

installed under this work. All tools to be new and still in manufacturers packaging. The cost for

these tools is to be included within the bid price for this work.

B. The terms “special tools” and “small equipment items” is meant to include such items as punch

down tools, connector assembly tools, etc. with each individual item having a retail replacement

cost not exceeding five hundred dollars ($500.00). It is NOT meant to include common hand

tools such as standard screwdrivers, pliers, wrenches, etc.

C. Submit the tool list along with the bid for this work. Include add/delete unit pricing for all tools

on the list.





SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass.

2. Clearing and grubbing.

3. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.

4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place, removing site

utilities.

5. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities,

temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection

facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field

measurements.

3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site

grading.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and

clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than

underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2

inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other

nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected

during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of

groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.





1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared

materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,

adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

site clearing.

B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying

and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and

mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on

property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before

site clearing.

D. The Contractor shall be required to contact “Bluestake” two working days prior to the start of

construction, and shall be responsible for maintaining current “Bluestake” markings throughout

construction. Additionally, the Contractor shall employ and use a private utility locating service

for all on-site utilities, special systems and private utilities not covered by “Bluestake.” The

Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for the repair and replacement of any

damaged utility lines.

Delta #5





D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control

measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in

Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not

available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during

construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site that complies with

EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ),

whichever is more stringent.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction

until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.

3.3 UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures

before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.





1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site

clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others

unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new

construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18

inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm),

and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 STOCKPILE

A. Stockpile materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade

and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).

2. Dispose of excess material as specified for waste material disposal.

3. Stockpile surplus material to allow for respreading.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to

facilitate new construction.





B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length

of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces

vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,

and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's

property, at no additional expense to Owner.

B. Burning on Owner’s Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner’s property.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. As listed on drawings.



PINAL COUNTY FACILITIES MANAGEMENT 17 MAY 2019


ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 321216 - 1

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Asphalt concrete paving and subgrade preparation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 32 Sections for other paving installed as part of crosswalks in asphalt pavement

areas.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Mix: Submit design mix-formula for asphalt concrete not less than 7 days in advance of

actual placement of material.

B. Certificates: Submit Certificate of Compliance indicating that materials to be incorporated in

Work meet Specification requirements.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.

B. Installer Qualifications: Imprinted-asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained

and approved for installation of imprinted asphalt required for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of Maricopa Association of Governments (MAG) Specifications and the Town of

Florence except as specified otherwise for asphalt paving work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard

specifications do not apply to this Section.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location

of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

b. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work.

Delta #5





c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic

during installation period and for remainder of construction period.

d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Transport bituminous mixtures to site in clean trucks and in manner to prevent segregation of

materials or inclusion of foreign substances.

B. Mix to consist of specified aggregate and bitumen.

C. Asphalt surface course mixture to have minimum temperature of 285 deg F (141 deg C) and

maximum temperature of 350 deg F (177 deg C).

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Conform to applicable requirements of MAG Section 321.

2. Place asphaltic concrete when surface is dry, when the ambient temperature in shade is

40 deg F (7 deg C) and rising, or above 50 deg F (10 deg C) if falling.

3. Do not place asphaltic concrete when weather is foggy, rainy, or when base on which

material is to be placed is wet or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Base Materials: Conform to MAG Sections 310 and 702 and requirements specified

herein. Material to be crushed rock product with a plasticity index not exceeding 5 and

comply with grading requirements shown in Table 702.

2. Aggregate: Clean and free of organic matter and of such a nature that it can be

compacted to a dense and firm layer capable of supporting loaded trucks and self-

propelled pavers without rutting.

3. Deliver aggregate to site in thoroughly blended condition and handle in manner to

prevent excessive segregation. Do not mix underlying soil or subbase with aggregate

base material. Do not mix underlying soil or subbase with aggregate base material.

B. Tack Coats:

1. Tack Coat: Mixing type emulsion SS-I-H, as specified in MAG Section 713, diluted in

proportion of approximately 50 percent water and 50 percent emulsion. See MAG

Section 321. Mixing temperature shall not be less that 250 deg F, or higher than 325

deg F.

C. Asphalt Concrete Paving:

1. Refer to MAG Section 710. Verify type with Soils Report and Civil Engineer.





2. Asphalt concrete shall be Type D-1/2 (12mm) single course mix. Percentage asphalt

range: 5.0 to 6.0.

3. When test procedures determine aggregate is subject to stripping, add dry hydrated lime

conforming to requirements of ASTM C207, Type N; portland cement conforming to

Section 725 of MAG Specifications; or other approved anti-strip agent.

D. Composition and Grading: Comply with MAG Section 710.3. Aggregates and mix to be

incorporated into work shall show loss in L.A. Rattler (ASTM C131) (after 500 revolutions) of

40% max.

E. Surface Seal Coat:

1. Emulsified Asphalt: Provide emulsified asphalt Grade SS-1h as specified in MAG

Section 713, diluted with a minimum of one part water to one part of emulsified asphalt.

2. Sand Blotter: In accordance with following sieve analysis:

a. 3/8 inch (9.53 mm): 100%

b. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 90 - 100%

c. No. 200 (0.0015 mm): 0 - 12%

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Spreading and Finishing Equipment: Comply with MAG Section 321.5.2.

1. Equipment to be of good condition and capable of performing Work specified in

satisfactory manner.

2. Start finish rolling after pavement has cooled sufficiently to permit removal of roller

marks and continue in whatever direction is necessary to produce a pavement surface free

of indentations. See MAG Section 321.

3. Leveling Course: Comply with MAG Section 321.8.3.

2.3 MIXES

A. Job-mix formula shall indicate percentage passing for each specified sieve size of mineral

aggregate and percent of asphalt to be used for each asphalt concrete mixture to be incorporated

on Project. Job-mix formula (gradation), with allowable tolerances for a single test, to be used

for job control. Single test variation tolerance is shown in following table. In no event shall

less than 2 percent of mineral aggregate pass a No. 200 (0.0015 mm) sieve.

1. No. 4 and larger 4.75mm and larger): + 7

2. No. 30 (0.0098mm): + 5

3. No. 200 (0.0015mm): + 2

4. Asphalt, percent by weight of mix: + 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.





1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than

15 tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Verify that utilities, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the asphalt surface

have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent asphalt prior

to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Backfill curbs prior to paving.

B. Base Preparation: Comply with MAG Section 321.5.1.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Base Course:

1. Construct aggregate base course on subgrade and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of

maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557.

B. Tack Coat:

1. Apply tack coat to vertical surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, gutters and construction

joints, against which additional material is to be placed, to a new or old pavement to be

overlaid, and to other surfaces as designated by Architect.

2. Tack coat to be slow setting type emulsion as specified. If emulsion is applied undiluted,

apply at rate of 0.02 to 0.10 gallons per square yard (0.08 to 0.38 liters per square meter);

if emulsion is applied diluted 1:1 with water, apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per

square yard (0.19 to 0.38 liter per square meter), as directed by Architect.

3. Clean surfaces of loose and foreign material prior to application of tack coats.

C. Asphaltic Concrete:

1. Construct asphalt pavement in accordance with applicable requirements of MAG

Section 321.

2. Place asphaltic concrete in thickness of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or more than

4 inches (100 mm) compacted.

3. Place asphaltic concrete in thickness as recommended by Soils Report.

4. If pavement is constructed in lifts using an asphalt concrete base in the first lifts, base to

be thoroughly cleaned by whatever means necessary prior to application of tack coat and

placement of surface layer.

D. Compaction: Comply with requirements of MAG Section 321.8.4.

1. Compact asphalt concrete surfacing to a density of 95 percent of 75 blows (ASTM

D1559).

2. Measure asphalt density by means of a nuclear density gauge, or core testing. Nuclear

gauge method will be preferred.





E. Upon completion, pavement surface to be smooth, dense and of uniform texture and

appearance.

1. All areas to properly drain and be free of standing water. Compacted thickness to be not

less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) of that shown on Drawings.

2. Finished surface not to vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a 25-foot (6000-mm) distance

as determined by a straight-edge placed in any position on finish surface, except across

flow lines.

3. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt

is still warm.

4. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement

to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

5. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials

and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and

surface smoothness.

6. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has

cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has

cooled enough not to become marked.

F. Corrective Requirements for Deficiencies: Comply with MAG Section 321.9.

G. Paving Termination:

1. Provide thickened edge at paving terminations that do not have wood header forms or

concrete curbs per MAG standard details.

2. Pavement termination to be minimum 12 inches wide x 8 inches deep (300 mm wide x

200 mm deep) or as shown on Drawings.

3.4 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement

section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300

mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically.

Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new

subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat

concrete pieces firmly.

1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary,

crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.

2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal

patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut

excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form

new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix

asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.





D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch

and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,

compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with

adjacent surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the

following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within

the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied

transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.6 WHEEL STOPS

A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer and MAG standard

detail 150.

B. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels

embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to

wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined

according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for

compliance with smoothness tolerances.

1. Finished surface to be smooth and finished to specified grade. Cut out and replace any

spots deficient in thickness with fresh mixture which is properly bonded to existing

pavement.

2. Test conformance of crown and grade of pavement as directed by Architect. Immediately

after initial rolling, correct variations by adding or removing material as required.

3. After final rolling, retest surface and correct irregularities in excess of specified tolerance

by removing defective Work and replacing with new material.

4. Furnish at least one 25-foot (6000 mm) straight-edge, true to line for its entire length.

Delta #5





D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and

compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from

four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared

according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples

according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement,

with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear

method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or

ASTM D 2726.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of all paving work, remove all debris and excess material and leave site in a

neat condition.





GRASSPAVE2 32 1243 - 1

SECTION 32 12 43 - GRASSPAVE2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Porous pavement system.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving

B. Section 33 46 00 – Subdrainage

C. Section 32 9000 Planting

D. Section 32 9200 – Turf and Grasses

E. Section 32 8400 – Planting Irrigation

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F 1951-08 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under

and Around Playground Equipment.

B. ASTM D 638-10 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

C. ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

D. AASHTO M6 Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Hydraulic Cement Concrete

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Grasspave2 porous pavement system provides vehicular and pedestrian load support for grass areas,

while protecting grass roots from harmful effects of traffic.

B. Major Components of the Complete System

1. Grasspave2 units, assembled in rolls.

2. Engineered sand and gravel base course.

3. Hydrogrow soil amendment and fertilizer, supplied with Grasspave2.

4. Sand fill or USGA greens mix.

5. Selected grass from seed, hydroseeding/hydro-mulching, or sod.

6. Selected topsoil (only for seeded installation).

7. Mulch (needed only for seeded or hydroseeded installations).

C. The Grasspave2 grass paving units, sand, and base course work together to support imposed loading.

D. The Grasspave2 grass paving units, Hydrogrow, and sand fill contribute to vegetation support.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as prescribed for in the submittals section of these specifications.





B. Shop Drawings: Submit design detail showing proper cross-section.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of Grasspave2 10” x 10” section of Grasspave2 material.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. Include methods for

maintaining installed products.

E. Certificates:

1. Manufacturer signed certificate stating the product is made in the USA.

2. Submit Material Certificates for base course and sand (or USGA mix) fill materials

3. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying material compliance of polyethylene used

to make Grasspave2 units.

4. ISO Certificate certifying manufacturer’s quality management system is currently registered to ISO

9001:2008 quality standards.

F. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met:

1. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate post-consumer recycled content and pre-

consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.

2. Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-

consumer recycled content for products having recycled content.

3. Description of Grasspave2 in stormwater design to limit the disruption of natural hydrology by

reducing impervious cover, increasing on-site infiltration, reducing or eliminating pollution from

stormwater runoff and eliminating contaminants.

4. Designing elements for Grasspave2 to limit the disruption and pollution of natural water flows by

managing stormwater runoff.

5. Documenting the use of Grasspave2 to reduce heat islands to minimize the impact on microclimates

and human and wildlife habitats.

G. Substitutions: No material will be considered as an equivalent to the Grasspave2 unit specified herein

unless it meets all areas of this specification without exception. Manufacturers seeking to supply what

they represent as equivalent material must submit records, data, independent test results, samples,

certifications, and documentation deemed necessary by the Specifier to prove equivalency.

H. Manufacturer’s Material Certification: Product manufacturers shall provide certification of compliance

with all applicable testing procedures and related specifications upon written request. Request for

certification shall be submitted by the purchasing agency no later than the date of order placement.

I. Product manufacturers shall also have a minimum of 30 years’ experience producing products for porous

pavement systems.

J. Manufacturer Quality Certification: ISO Certification certifying manufacturer’s quality management

system for its Grasspave2 system is currently registered to ISO 9001:2008 quality standards. Any

alternate materials submitted shall provide a certification that their porous pavement system

manufacturing process is part of an ISO program and a certification will be required specifically stating

that their testing facility is certified and in accordance with ISO.


A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.

LEED SUBMITTALS ARE NOTA PART OF THIS PROJECT.

Delta #4





B. Protect Grasspave2 units/rolls from damage during delivery and store rolls upright, under tarp, to protect

from sunlight, when time for delivery to installation exceeds one week.

C. Store Hydrogrow in a dark and dry location

D. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Notes: Once healthy turf has been established, the cell wall structure will have minimal visibility when proper

turf maintenance practices are followed.

A. Installer responsible for maintenance of grass plants – water/irrigation, fertilizing, mowing – for one

growing season. DO NOT AERATE. See Grasspave2 Maintenance Guide from Invisible Structures

B. System to be maintained by owner, after one growing season.

1.8 Project Conditions

A. Maintain environmental conditions within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do

not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Do not begin installation of porous pavements until all hard surface paving adjacent to porous pavement

areas, including concrete walks and asphalt paving, is completed.

C. Install turf when ambient air temperatures is at least 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).

D. In cold weather, do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost, and do not

build on frozen base or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade.

E. Protect partially completed paving against damage from other construction traffic when work is in

progress.

F. Adequately water sod or grass seed to assure germination of seed and growth of root system.

G. Grass coverage on the sand-filled Grasspave2 rings must be completed within one week: See Part 3

Execution.

H. DO NOT DRIVE, PARK ON, or use Grasspave2 system for two or three mowing cycles until grass root

system has matured (about 3 to 4 weeks for sod or 6 to 8 weeks for seeded areas). Any barricades

constructed must still be accessible by emergency and fire equipment during and after installation.

1.9 LIMITED WARRANTY

A. Invisible Structures, Inc. (ISI) warrants to its purchasers that all products furnished by ISI will be free

from defects in material and/or workmanship.

B. This warranty shall be extended for a period of five (5) years following the date of shipment by ISI.

C. Providing a written claim is presented to ISI within the warranty period and after inspection by ISI

showing the materials have failed under this warranty, all defective materials shall be refurnished under

this warranty, at no charge, excluding re-installation costs. This in lieu of all other warranties expressed or

implied and is the sole warranty extended by ISI.

D. Our liability under this warranty is limited to the refurnishing of materials and does not include any

responsibility for incidental, consequential, or other damages of any nature.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Invisible Structures, Inc., which is located at: 1600 Jackson St. Suite 310 ;

Golden, CO 80401; Toll Free Tel: 800-233-1510; Tel: 303-233-8383; Email: request info

([email protected]); Web: www.invisiblestructures.com.

B. Substitutions: Only on an “as equal” basis determined through the “Substitution Request” process. Any

substitution will need to be reviewed and approved by the Florence Fire Department prior to being

determined an “as equal” product.

2.2 GRASSPAVE2

A. Composition:

1. Manufactured in the USA.

2. High density polyethylene (HDPE): 100 percent recycled materials.

3. Color: black

4. Color Uniformity: Uniform color throughout all units rolls.

5. Carbon Black for ultraviolet light stabilization.

6. Hydrogrow soil amendment and fertilizer, provided by manufacturer with Grasspave2.

B. Performance Properties:

1. Maximum Loading Capability: 15,940 psi (2.29 million psf, 109,906 kPa) when filled with sand.

2. Wheelchair Access testing for ADA Compliance: Passing ASTM F 1951-08.

3. Wheelchair Access testing for ADA Compliance: Passing Rotational Penetrometer testing.

4. Tensile strength, pull-apart testing: 458 lbf/in from ASTM D638 Modified.

5. System Permeability (Grasspave2, sand, base course): 2.63 to 38.55 inches of water per hour.

6. Effective Imperviousness (E.I.): 10%.

C. Dimensions (individual units are assembled and distributed into rolls):

1. Roll area: From 108 sq ft (10 sq m) to 538 sq ft (50 sq m), in 108 sq ft (10 sq m) increments

2. Roll Widths: From 3.3 ft (1 m) to 8.2 ft (2.5 m), in 1.6 ft (0.5 m) increments.

3. Roll Lengths: From 32.8 ft (10m) to 65.6 ft (20 m), in 3.3 ft (1 m) increments.

4. Roll Weights: From 41 lbs (19kg) to 205 lbs (93kg), in 41 lbs (19 kg) increments.

5. Unit Nominal Width by Length: 20 inches by 20 inches (0.5 m by 0.5 m) or 40 inches by 40 inches

(1 m by 1 m).

6. Nominal Depth: 1 inch (2.5 cm) – for rolls and individual units.

7. Unit Weight: 18 oz (510 g) or 5 lbs. (2.27 kg).

8. Volume Solid: 8 percent.

2.3 SYSTEM MATERIALS

Notes: All measurements are subject to manufacturing tolerances, unless otherwise specified.

A. Base Course: Sandy gravel material from local sources commonly used for road base construction

(recycled materials such as crushed concrete or crushed asphalt are NOT acceptable).

1. Conforming to the following sieve analysis and requirements:





a. 100 percent passing sieve size 1 inch (25 mm).

b. 90-100 percent passing sieve size 3/4 inch (19 mm).

c. 70-80 percent passing sieve size 3/8 inch (9 mm).

d. 55-70 percent passing sieve size #4.

e. 45-55 percent passing sieve size #10.

f. 25-35 percent passing sieve size #40.

g. 3-8 percent passing sieve size #200.

2. Base course shall be a minimum of 6” deep and meet the design and performance requirements of

the governing fire department for this project.

3. Provide a base course material nearly neutral in pH (range from 6.5 to 7.2) to provide adequate

root zone development for turf.

4. Material may be either "pit run" or "crusher run." Avoid using clay based crusher run/pit run.

Crusher run material will generally require coarse, well-draining sand conforming to AASHTO

M6 or ASTM C 33 to be added to mixture (20 to 30 percent by volume) to ensure long-term

porosity.

5. Alternative materials such as crushed shell, limerock, or crushed lava may be used for base course

use, provided they are mixed with sharp sand (20 to 30 percent) to ensure long-term porosity, and

are brought to proper compaction. Without added sand, crushed shell and limerock set up like

concrete and become impervious.

6. Alternative size and/or composition of base course materials should be submitted to Invisible

Structures, Inc. (Manufacturer) for approval.

B. Sand Fill for Rings and Spaces Between Rings: Clean sharp sand (washed concrete sand). Choose one of

the following:

1. Coarse, well-draining sand, such as washed concrete sand conforming to AASHTO M6 or ASTM

C-33.

2. United States Golf Association (USGA) greens, section - sand mix “The Root Zone Mixture.”

C. Turf Conditioner:

1. Hydrogrow a proprietary soil amendment manufactured by Invisible Structures, Inc. and provided

with Grasspave2.

2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS.

D. Grass:

1. Sod: “MidIron” Bermudagrass. Use 13 mm (0.5") thick (soil thickness) rolled sod from a reputable local

grower. Species should be wear resistant, free from disease, and in excellent condition. Sod shall be

grown in sand or sandy loam soils only. Sod grown in soils of clay, silt, or high organic materials such

as peat, will not be accepted.

Notes: For Fire lanes and emergency access, It is recommended that Fire Department inspectors be scheduled

to inspect installation of Grasspave2 during preparation of the subbase, installation of the base course, and

installation of Grasspave2 units. Most small projects can accommodate these inspections all on the same day.

Verify with Fire Department if certificates of inspection are required.





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine subgrade and base course installed conditions. Do not start porous paving installation until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Check for improperly compacted trenches, debris, and improper

gradients.

B. For fire lane installations: prior to installing base course for turf paving, obtain approval of local fire

authorities of sub-base.

C. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory

performance. If existing conditions are found unsatisfactory, contact Architect for resolution.

3.2 PREPARATION

Notes: Ensure that subbase materials are structurally adequate to receive designed base course, wearing course,

and designed loads. Generally, excavation into undisturbed normal strength soils will require no additional

modification. Fill soils and otherwise structurally weak soils may require modifications, such as geotextiles,

geogrids, and/or compaction (not to exceed 90%). Ensure that grading and soil porosity of the subbase will

provide adequate subsurface drainage

A. Subgrade Preparation:

1. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 32 10 00. Verify subgrade in accordance with porous

paving system manufacturer's instructions.

2. Proper subgrade preparation will enable the Grasspave2 rolls/units to connect properly and remain

level and stationary after installation.

3. Excavate area allowing for unit thickness, the engineered base depth (where required), and 0.5 inch

(1.25 cm) for depth of sod root zone or topsoil germination area (when applicable).

4. Provide adequate drainage from excavated area if area has potential to collect water, when working

with in-place soils that have poor permeability.

5. Ensure in-place soil is relatively dry and free from standing water.

6. Uniformly grade base.

7. Level and clear base of large objects, such as rocks and pieces of wood.

B. Base Preparation:

1. Install Base as specified in Section 32 10 00. Verify engineered base (if required) is installed in

accordance with porous paving system manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Coordinate base installation and preparation with subdrains specified in Section 33 46 00.

3. If required, place a geotextile separation layer between the natural ground and the ‘engineered

base’.

4. If required, install the specified sub-drain and outlet according to construction drawings.

5. Coordinate base installation and preparation with irrigation and drip irrigation lines specified in

Section 32 80 00 and 32 84 13, respectively.

6. Place engineered base in lifts not to exceed 6 inches (150 mm), compacting each lift separately to

95 percent Modified Proctor.

7. Leave 1 inch (2.5 cm) of depth below final grade for porous paver unit and sand fill and 0.5 inch

(1.25 cm) for depth of sod root zone or topsoil germination area (when applicable).





3.4 HYDROGROW INSTALLATION

A. Spread all Hydrogrow mix provided (spreader rate = 4.53 kg per 100 m2 (10 lbs per 1076 ft2) evenly over

the surface of the base course with a hand-held, or wheeled, rotary spreader.

B. The Hydrogrow mix should be placed immediately before installing the Grasspave2.

3.5 GRASSPAVE2 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Grasspave2 units by placing units with rings facing up, and using snap-fit connectors, pegs and

holes, provided to maintain proper spacing and interlock the units. Units can be easily shaped with

pruning shears or knife. Units placed on curves, slopes, and high traffic areas shall be anchored to the

base course, using 40d common nails with fender washer, as required to secure units in place. Tops of

rings shall be between 6 mm to 13 mm (0.25" to 0.5") below the surface of adjacent hard-surface

pavements.

B. Install sand in rings as they are laid in sections by "back-dumping" directly from a dump truck, or from

buckets mounted on tractors, which then exit the site by driving over rings already filled with sand. The

sand is then spread laterally from the pile using flat bottomed shovels and/or wide "asphalt rakes" to fill

the rings. A stiff bristled broom should be used for final "finishing" of the sand. The sand must be

"compacted" by using water from hose, irrigation heads, or rainfall, with the finish grade no less than the

top of rings and no more than 6 mm (0.25") above top of rings.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF GRASS

A. Grass coverage on the sand-filled rings must be completed within one week. Sand must be re-installed

and leveled and Grasspave2 checked for integrity if rings become exposed due to wind, rain, traffic, or

other factors. (Choose one paragraph below to meet grass installation method desired.)

1. Install thin sod directly over sand filled rings, filled no higher than the top of the rings. Sod strips

should be placed with very tight joints. Sodded areas must be fertilized and kept moist during root

establishment (minimum of 3 weeks). DO NOT DRIVE ON SYSTEM: Sodded areas must be

protected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a period of 3 to 4 weeks, or until the

root system has penetrated and established well below the Grasspave2 units.

B. Adequately water sod to assure germination of seed and growth of root system.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Sodded areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a period of 3 to 4

weeks, or until the root system has penetrated below the Grasspave2 units.


A. Remove and replace segments of Grasspave2 units where three or more adjacent rings are broken or

damaged, reinstalling as specified, so no evidence of replacement is apparent.

B. Perform cleaning during the installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove all excess

materials, debris, and equipment from site. Repair any damage to adjacent materials and surfaces

resulting from installation of this work.





3.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain grass in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified in Section 32 92 00

Manufacturers of Turfs and Grasses.

B. Lawn Care: Normal turf care procedures should be followed, including de-thatching.

C. DO NOT AERATE. Aerator will damage the Grasspave2 units. Aeration in not necessary in a sand root

zone.

END OF SECTION

UP UP

RE

F.

UP UP

RE

F.

02 03 04 05

B

01 0706

C

1

A6.1

1

A6.1

OFFICE

1102

OFFICE

1103

OFFICE

1104

OFFICE

1105

PUBLIC

INTERVIEW

1107

PUBLIC

INTERVIEW

1108

CONTROL

ROOM

1109

EVIDENCE LAB

1112

OFFICE

1208

OFFICE

1209

MECHANICAL

ROOM

1210

EXIT

CORRIDOR

1021

OFFICE

1310

OFFICE

1309

OFFICE

1308

OFFICE

1307

OFFICE

1306

OFFICE

1305

ELEC.

1008

MDF

1009

EAST STAIR

1010

2

A6.1

2

A6.1

WEST STAIR

1001

HALLWAY

1004

JANITOR

1006

CONFERENCE

1303

MENS RR

1002

WOMEN'S RR

1003

EXIT

CORRIDOR

1018

SOFT ROOM

1101

BREAK

1304

VAULT

1201

NW HALLWAY

1011

BOILER ROOM

1301

OFFICE

1302

NORTH ENTRY

1012

PRINT

1205

UNISEX

1005

OFFICE

1204

VESTIBULE

1016

SOUTH ENTRY

1019

RECEPTION

1206

SE HALLWAY

1020

RECEPTION

1106

72 SF

NE HALLWAY

1014A2.1

31

1101 1102 1103 1104 1105

A8.1

1

1303

A8.2

1

A2.2

21

A8.3

1

1210

D

1018C

A11.141

A11.215

A11.1 12 A11.111A11.1 22

A11.1

21

A11.1

31

A11.221

51

A7.1

E2 E2 E2 E2 A6

F3

A

B

F1 MM

A

MM

A

A

B

B

E2

E2

A

C

C

E2E2

E2

E2E2

E2

E2

B

BB

B

E

A

E

D

D

D

D

E

ACC

C

C

C

F

F

51

A7.2

EVIDENCE

STORAGE

1110

OFFICE

1207

OFFICE

1203

OFFICE

1202

SW HALLWAY

1017

1202

52

A7.2

54

A7.1

53

A7.1

52

A7.1

A5.4

1

1109

1107

1108

1005

1006

1014

1204

1112

1207

1208

12091009

1008

1010

1021

1310

1309

1308

1307

1306

1305

1020

1301

1203

1302

1001

1003

10021201

1011

A.7

A2.3 26

3

A6.1

3

A6.1

14

ELEC.

1008A

1008A

W10 W11 W11 W11 W11 W10 W10 W10 W10

W10

W10

W10 W10 W10W10 W10 W10 W10 W10 W10

SF1

1110

ARMORY

1111

1111

W11

B

B

B

B

W10

W10

W10 W10 W11W11 W10

W12 W9

P5

M2

P5

M2

P5

M2

M2

B.3

A7.4

21

A7.4

31

A7.4

41A7.4

51

A7.4

12

A7.4

22A7.4

32

A7.4

42

A7.4

52

A7.4

33

A7.4

43

A7.4

23

A7.4

13

A7.4

53

1018A 1018B

E2

B

F1

ELEVATOR

B

ELEVATOR

A

A

E

B

C2

E2

E2

A

M3

E2TYP

23.01

TYP

08.05

08.02

08.02

23.01

23.01

08.15

08.15

EXISTING BUILDING

01.01

06.01

12.01

10.02

26.08

26.05

08.22

26.04

06.01

12.02

06.01

10.01

10.02

26.08

04.03

A7.5

25

A7.5

35 A7.5

45

A7.4

41

SIM.

A7.4

41

SIM.

A7.4

51

SIM.

OPP.

A7.5

55

1019

A

1012

SF1

SF4

SF3

1004A

1004B

A11.2

22

SID

E

GA

TE

E6

SIM.

SIM.

06.02

08.23

08.23

13

A11.1

15

05.37

05.37

A7.4

11

A9.4

43

A9.4

53

A9.5

22

A9.5

12

A7.5

51

A7.5

41

A7.5

52

45

A9.526.04

26.0405.24

05.24

28.01

28.01

CN1 F CN1

B

B E

E

02.38

M

M

M

MM

2

TYP.

A9.2

52

2

02 03 04 05

B

01 0706

C

OFFICE

1102

OFFICE

1103

OFFICE

1104

OFFICE

1105

PUBLIC

INTERVIEW

1107

PUBLIC

INTERVIEW

1108

CONTROL

ROOM

1109

EVIDENCE LAB

1112

OFFICE

1208

OFFICE

1209

MECHANICAL

ROOM

1210

EXIT

CORRIDOR

1021

OFFICE

1310

OFFICE

1309

OFFICE

1308

OFFICE

1307

OFFICE

1306

OFFICE

1305

ELEC.

1008

MDF

1009

EAST STAIR

1010

WEST STAIR

1001

HALLWAY

1004

JANITOR

1006

CONFERENCE

1303

MENS RR

1002

WOMEN'S RR

1003

EXIT

CORRIDOR

1018

SOFT ROOM

1101

BREAK

1304

VAULT

1201

NW HALLWAY

1011

BOILER ROOM

1301

OFFICE

1302

NORTH ENTRY

1012

PRINT

1205

UNISEX

1005 OFFICE

1204

VE

ST

IBU

LE

1016

SOUTH ENTRY

1019

RECEPTION

1206

SE HALLWAY

1020

RECEPTION

1106

NE HALLWAY

1014

8' - 9 3/4" 10' - 0" 10' - 0" 10' - 0" 10' - 2 1/2" 9' - 4 1/4"

2' - 6" 7' - 10 1/4" 10' - 10" 7' - 2" 4' - 1 3/4"2' - 3 1/2"

11' - 8" 6' - 7 1/4"

9' - 10 1/4" 10' - 0" 10' - 0" 7' - 8 1/4" 5' - 1 1/4" 17' - 0 3/4"

6' - 4 1/4" 3' - 1" 4' - 10" 13' - 1" 5' - 3 3/4" 6' - 4 1/4"

8"

10' - 9 1/4" 9' - 9"

10' -

9"

18' -

8"

10' -

11"

7' - 1 3/4"

2' - 0 1/4"11' - 3 1/2"

3' - 1" 4' - 10"

8" 8"

3' - 9"

1"

10' -

10"

7"

12' -

8 1

/2"

ALIGN9 1/4"9 1/4"

2' - 0 1/4"

OFFICE

1203

OFFICE

1202

SW HALLWAY

1017

ALIGN

EVIDENCE

STORAGE

1110

OFFICE

1207

18' -

9 3

/4"

8' -

1"

2' -

6 1

/2"

5' -

7"

8' -

1"

1' - 8"

3' - 8" 24' - 2" 7' - 8" 5' - 0" 5' - 8" 9' - 4" 2' - 4"

11' -

1"

10' -

9"

5' -

0"

13' -

8"

2' -

0 1

/2"

1' -

3"

7' -

4"

5' -

4 3

/4"

A.7

10"

15' -

4"

9' -

4"

5' -

7 1

/4"

5' -

0 3

/4"

10' -

8"

13' -

7 1

/4"

11 1

/4"

1' - 8"

2' - 2 1/4"

10' - 8" 9' - 4" 5' - 7 3/4" 5' - 0 1/4" 9' - 4" 10' - 8" 4' - 11 3/4" 10' - 0" 20' - 0" 4' - 11 3/4" 10' - 8" 9' - 4" 5' - 0 1/4" 5' - 7 3/4" 9' - 4" 10' - 8" 9' - 4" 10' - 8" 9' - 4" 4' - 4 1/4"

11 1/4"27' - 10" 30' - 0" 30' - 0" 30' - 0" 30' - 0" 29' - 4"

177' - 2"

29' -

4"

29' -

4"

27' - 10" 30' - 0" 30' - 0" 30' - 0" 30' - 0" 29' - 4"

10' -

10 1

/2"

13' -

8"

12' -

5"

9"

1' -

3"

1' -

11 1

/2"

7' -

4 3

/4"

3' -

2"

11' -

8 1

/4"

2' -

3"

10' -

5 1

/2"

4' - 0" 2' - 6"

11' - 8 1/2"

8 1/2"8' - 10" 9' - 2" 9' - 2"

2' - 10"

6' - 3" 9' - 1 1/2" 9' - 1 1/4" 5' - 10 1/4"11 1/2"2' - 6 3/4" 10' - 2 3/4" 5' - 8 1/2"

2' - 3 3/4"

9' - 4" 10' - 8" 9' - 4" 10' - 8" 9' - 4" 5' - 8 1/4" 2' - 8" 5' - 2"

11 1/4"

6' - 2" 18' - 0"

6' -

1 1

/4"

13' -

5"

15' -

9 1

/4"25' - 3"

177' - 2"

1' - 0"19' - 0" 8' - 11 3/4"

1' - 0 1/4"

7 1

/4"

B.3

ELEVATOR

B

ELEVATOR

A

ELEC.

1008A

4' -

0"

4"

4' - 4"

3' - 0"

EXISTING

BUILDING

01.01

A

22' -

5 1

/2"

4' -

0"

3' -

9 1

/2"

4' -

11 1

/2"

4' -

9"

20' -

6 3

/4"

1' - 0 1/4"27' - 11 1/2"

1' - 0 1/4"

5' - 2 1/4" 12' - 0 3/4" 10' - 10"

5"2' - 4"

2

© D

LR

Gro

up

Revisions

11

/6/2

019

3:0

4:4

4 P

M

C:\R

evit\3

0-1

91

01

-00_

AR

_P

ina

l_C

o_

Atto

rneys_2

01

8_

dly

on

5A

KX

F.r

vt

30-19101-00

09.06.19

PIN

AL

CO

UN

TY

AT

TO

RN

EY

'S O

FF

ICE

CONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS

FLOOR PLANS -FIRST LEVEL

A1.1

971 E

AS

T J

AS

ON

LO

PE

Z C

IRC

LE

-B

UIL

DIN

G "

F"

FLO

RE

NC

E, A

RIZ

ON

A 8

5132

NORTHSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

ANNOTATION FLOOR PLAN - FIRST LEVEL

NORTHSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN - FIRST LEVEL

01.01 EXISTING BUILDING

02.38 SEE SITE PLAN AS1.2 FOR CONTINUATION OF MASONRY

SCREEN WALL

04.03 REINFORCED MASONRY SCREEN WALL.

05.24 ELEVATOR PIT LADDER.

05.37 CANOPY ABOVE

06.01 MILLWORK. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.

06.02 COUNTERTOP. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.

08.02 HORIZONTAL FIRE DOOR. 90-MINUTE RATED.

08.05 SLIDING GLASS "BARN DOOR" PER SCHEDULE.

08.15 WALL LOUVER.

08.22 ONE-WAY WINDOW WITH TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS.

CONTROL ROOM # 1109 TO SEE INTO PUBLIC INTERVIEW

#1108.

08.23 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR SWITCH LOCATION.

10.01 WALL-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER.

10.02 RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET.

12.01 COPIER. N.I.C.

12.02 REFRIGERATOR.

23.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.

26.04 ELECTRICAL PANEL. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.

26.05 TRANSFORMER.

26.08 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. REFER TO ELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS.

28.01 FIRE ALARM PULL

2 09/06/19 DESIGN

COORDINATION

5 11/5/19 ADDENDUM 4

5

A. ALL HOLLOW METAL FRAMES SET IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS SHALL BE GROUTED SOLID.

B. ALL HOLLOW METAL FRAMES SET IN METAL STUD WALLS SHALL BE FILLED WITH MINERAL WOOL BLANKET INSULATION.

C. ALL EXTERIOR FRAMES SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH 1/4" SHIM AND SEALANT AROUND PERIMETER OF FRAME.

D. MASONRY LINTELS AND STEEL LINTELS ARE SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.

E. GLASS TYPES FOR DOORS ARE INDICATED IN THE DOOR GLAZING COLUMN OF THE DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE. GLASS TYPES FOR FRAMES ARE INDICATED ON THE FRAME ELEVATIONS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS.

F. EXTERIOR FRAME TYPES ARE INDICATED WITH THE HEXAGON SYMBOL.

G. FOR COILING DOORS, GRILLES AND SECTIONAL DOORS, WIDTH AND HEIGHT DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE REPRESENT FINISHED OPENING SIZE. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE EXACT SIZE OF DOOR WITH MANUFACTURER.

H. FRAME MANUFACTURER SHALL COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL CONCEALED CONDUIT AND J-BOXES REQUIRED FOR SECURITY SYSTEM HARDWARE PRIOR TO MANUFACTURING OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES AND COORDINATE WITH SECURITY HARDWARE AND DEVICES.

I. PROVIDE HEAD RECEIVERS AT ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND CURTAIN WALLS AS REQUIRED FOR STRUCTURAL DEFLECTION ALLOWANCE.

J. SEE SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE SECTION FOR HARDWARE SETS NOTED IN DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE.

K. VERIFY ALL KEYING REQUIREMENTS WITH THE OWNER.L. VERIFY ALL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS (IE: KEY CARD ACCESS

DOORS) WITH OWNER.M. ALL HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ARE TO BE PAINTED

TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINISH, REFER TO FINISH PLANS.N. FOR ALL INTERIOR GLASS OFFICE WALLS AND DOORS SEE

SHEET A12.4.

A

SC

HE

DU

LES

EE

SCHED.SEE

SC

HE

DU

LE

SE

E

SCHED.SEE

CTG

C

1 A2

SE

E S

CH

ED

.

2"

2" 2"

SEE SCHED.

2"

SE

E S

CH

ED

.

2" 2" 1' - 10" 2"

SEE SCHED.

CTG

4"

3

2"

SE

E S

CH

ED

.

2" 2"

SEE SCHED.

36

A9.2

46

A9.2

SIM.

AL = ALUMINUMAN = ANODIZEDGL = GLASS (TEMPERED)HM = HOLLOW METALHW = HARDWARE (GROUP)PT = PAINTST = STAINWD = WOOD

DOOR SCHEDULE

ABBREVIATIONS

A. ALL DOOR OPERATING HARDWARE SHALL BE LEVER-TYPE OR OTHER ACCESSIBLE TYPE PER ADAAG.

B. ALL DOOR HARDWARE SHALL BE OPERABLE WITHOUT SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR KEY, AND WITH ONE HAND.

DOOR HARDWARE

GENERAL NOTES

© D

LR

Gro

up

Revisions

11

/6/2

019

3:0

4:4

4 P

M

C:\R

evit\3

0-1

91

01

-00_

AR

_P

ina

l_C

o_

Atto

rneys_2

01

8_

dly

on

5A

KX

F.r

vt

30-19101-00

09.06.19

PIN

AL

CO

UN

TY

AT

TO

RN

EY

'S O

FF

ICE


DOORSCHEDULES,DOOR ANDFRAME TYPES

A9.1

971 E

AS

T J

AS

ON

LO

PE

Z C

IRC

LE

-B

UIL

DIN

G "

F"

FLO

RE

NC

E, A

RIZ

ON

A 8

5132

DOORNUMBER

PANEL FRAME

FIRERATING

HARDWAREFUNCTION

HARDWARESET

DETAILS

COMMENTSNO. OFPANELS WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS MATERIAL GLASS TYPE DEPTH MATERIAL TYPE HEAD

JAMBLEFT

JAMBRIGHT SILL

1001 1 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 11" HM 1 90 MIN EGRESS 205 31/A9.2 41/A9.2 41/A9.2 51/A9.2 4" HEAD

1002 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - PRIVACY 210 11/A9.2 21/A9.2 21/A9.2 45/A9.2


1004A 2 3' - 0" 8' - 10" 2" GL CTG A 4 1/2" ALUM ALUM - AL-02 36/A9.2 46/A9.2 46/A9.2 44/A9.2

1004B 2 3' - 0" 8' - 10" 2" GL CTG A 4 1/2" ALUM ALUM - AL-02 36/A9.2 46/A9.2 46/A9.2 44/A9.2


1006 1 2' - 4" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - STOREROOM 214 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24/A9.2 34/A9.2 170 DEGREES HINGE

1008 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN STOREROOM 212 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24/A9.2 34/A9.2 PROVIDE SIGNAGE: "ELECTRICAL ROOM".MATCH DOOR SIGNAGE STANDARD

1008A 1 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN STOREROOM 213 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24/A9.2 34/A9.2

1009 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN STOREROOM 203 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24/A9.2 34/A9.2

1010 1 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 11" HM 1 90 MIN EGRESS 205 31/A9.2 41/A9.2 41/A9.2 51/A9.2 4" HEAD

1011 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - EGRESS 201 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24/A9.2 34/A9.2

1012 2 3' - 0" 7' - 11" 2" GL CTG A 4 1/2" ALUM ALUM - AL-01 36/A9.2 46/A9.2 46/A9.2 56/A9.2

1014 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - EGRESS 201 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 25/A9.2 45/A9.2

1018A - 90 MIN AUTO - SMOKE RU-01 - - - - WON-DOOR HORIZONTAL 90-MINUTE FIRE DOOR

1018B 90 MIN AUTO - SMOKE RU-01 - - - - WON-DOOR HORIZONTAL 90-MINUTE FIRE DOOR

1018C 1 3' - 0" 7' - 8" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - EGRESS 100 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24/A9.2 53 / A9.2

1019 2 3' - 0" 7' - 11" 2" GL CTG A 4 1/2" ALUM ALUM - AL-01 36/A9.2 46/A9.2 46/A9.2 56 / A9.2

1020 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - EGRESS 200 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 25/A9.2 45 / A9.2

1021 1 3' - 0" 7' - 8" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - EGRESS 100 12/A9.2 22/A9.2 22/A9.2 32 / A9.2

1107 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - PASSAGE 209 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 25/A9.2 45/A9.2

1108 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - PASSAGE 209 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 25/A9.2 45/A9.2

1109 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 4 1/2" ALUM 1 - OFFICE 202 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 25/A9.2 45 / A9.2

1110 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN. STOREROOM 203 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2

1111 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN STOREROOM 203 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2

1112 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 90 OFFICE 203 14/A9.2 24/A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2

1201 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 2 20 MIN OFFICE 203 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

1203 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD CTG A 8 1/4" ALUM 2 - OFFICE 202 15/A9.2 25 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 45/A9.2

1204 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD CTG A 5 7/8" ALUM 2 - OFFICE 202 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

1210 2 3' - 0" 7' - 8" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 90 STOREROOM 101 12/A9.2 22/A9.2 22/A9.2 32/A9.2

1301 1 4' - 0" 7' - 8" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - EGRESS 102 12/A9.2 22/A9.2 22/A9.2 32/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

1309 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD CTG A 5 7/8" ALUM 2 OFFICE 202 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

MECH.YARD

2 3' - 0" 8' - 8" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - PAD LOCK G-01 - - - -

SIDE GATE 1 4' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" STL - A 3" STL 1 - - G-02 - - - -

D O O R A N D F R A M E S C H E D U L E S

DOORNUMBER

PANEL FRAME

FIRERATING

HARDWAREFUNCTION

HARDWARESET

DETAILS

COMMENTSNO. OFPANELS WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS MATERIAL GLASS TYPE DEPTH MATERIAL TYPE HEAD JAMB LEFT JAMB RIGHT SILL

2001 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 11" HM 1 90 MIN EGRESS 207 31 / A9.2 41 / A9.2 41 / A9.2 51 / A9.2

2002 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - PASSAGE 210 11 / A9.2 21 / A9.2 21 / A9.2 45 / A9.2


2005 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - PRIVACY 216 15 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 45 / A9.2

2006 1 2' - 4" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - STOREROOM 213 14 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2 170 DEGREE HINGE


2008 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN STOREROOM 212 14 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2 PROVIDE SIGNAGE: "ELECTRICALROOM". MATCH DOOR SIGNAGESTANDARD

2009 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 20 MIN STOREROOM 212 14 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2


2203 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - STOREROOM 214 15 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 45 / A9.2


2nd FLOOR

DOORNUMBER

PANEL FRAME

FIRERATING

HARDWAREFUNCTION

HARDWARESET

DETAILS













3rd FLOOR

DOORNUMBER

PANEL FRAME

FIRERATING

HARDWAREFUNCTION

HARDWARESET

DETAILS













4205A 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - STOREROOM 212 15 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 45 / A9.2

4205B 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 1 - STOREROOM 211 15 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 25 / A9.2 45 / A9.2

4th FLOOR

DOORNUMBER

PANEL FRAME

FIRERATING

HARDWAREFUNCTION

HARDWARESET

DETAILS

COMMENTSNO. OFPANELS WIDTH HEIGHT

THICKNESS MATERIAL GLASS TYPE DEPTH MATERIAL TYPE HEAD JAMB LEFT JAMB RIGHT SILL

-




5004 2 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 2" GL CTG A 4 1/2" ALUM 2 - - GL-01 36 / A9.2 46 / A9.2 46 / A9.2 44 / A9.2

5005 2 2' - 4" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A 5 3/4" HM 1 - - 215 14 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2

5006 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" HM - A 5 3/4" HM 1 - STOREROOM 213 14 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 24 / A9.2 34 / A9.2







5016 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 2 - OFFICE 201 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

5017 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" ALUM - C 5 3/4" ALUM 1 90 MIN CORRIDOR AL-04 SIM 36/A9.2 46/A9.2 46/A9.2 44/A9.2 THIS ITEM IS PART OF THE BRIDGEALTERNATE

5101 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 2 - CLASSROOM 206 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

5102 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" WD - A 5 7/8" ALUM 2 - PASSAGE 202 15/A9.2 25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2


25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2



25/A9.2 -35/A9.2

45/A9.2

5304 2 3' - 0" 7' - 11" 2" GL CTG A 4 1/2" ALUM 2 - - AL-03 36 / A9.2 46/A9.2 46/A9.2 44/A9.2

5601 1 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" ALUM C 5 3/4" ALUM 1 90 MIN CORRIDOR AL-04 36 / A9.2 46 / A9.2 46 / A9.2 44/A9.2 THIS ITEM IS PART OF THE BRIDGEALTERNATE

5th FLOOR

D O O R T Y P E S

D O O R F R A M E E L E V A T I O N S

DOOR AND FRAME

GENERAL NOTES

D O O R A N D F R A M E S C H E D U L E S

1st FLOOR

2

2 2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 09/06/19 DESIGNCOORDINATION

4 10/28/19 ADDENDUM 1


4

4

5

PINAL COUNTY ATTORNEY'S OFFICE

ACCEPTED SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS

11/05/19

Ref. Doc./ Designer Response

No. Spec Sec MANUFACTURER Product Notes By Date

1102113.14.2.2B Hadrian Ceiling hung toilet partion Partitions are to be stainless steel, brushed finish (non-

embossed)

DRL 11/5/2019


BID REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

11/05/19

Comment Ref. Doc./ Designer Response Follow Up To Cross

No. Spec Sec Question Rvwr Discussion By Date Response (4,5,6 or7) Chkd By

BID-RFI-005.1 DP01

Keynote 4 remove the fire lane. What is the lane made of

asphalt or concrete?

Ismael Jacobo The Fire lane is made of compacted 12" thick AB

Materials with concrete curb.

HPP 10/31/2019

BID-RFI-005.2 DP01 Keynote 6 remove chain link fence. How tall is this fence? Ismael Jacobo The Chain Link Fence is #9 - and 8 Ft. Tall. HPP 10/31/2019

BID-RFI-006.1 TE0.1

On the Telecom Print TE0.1 it calls for 2 Cat 6A cables per

outlet. The Division 27 spec calls for (1) Cat 6A voice cable and

(1) Cat 6 data cable. Which standard should be followed?

Kris Senzee Follow TE0.1 DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.2

What is the distance from the existing Communications vault

to the existing Comm room in the adjacent building?

Kris Senzee Per Pinal County IT, connection is expected to be

made at the existing communications vault. Exact

distance from there to existing comm room is not

known.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.3

In the MDF/IDF rooms, they show (2) Vertical Managers

between the racks. Are we allowed to use 1 appropriately sized

Vertical Manager instead?

Kris Senzee Yes. DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.4 Division 28

Is there a Division 28 specification? Kris Senzee This item is pending Pinal County IT review.

Contractor shall provide an allowance for items in

this section.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.5Is this a Prevailing Wage/Davis Bacon project? Kris Senzee See Owner's response to same question in

Addendum 2

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.6 Spec 102600

The noted specification lists Wall and Door Protection and

identifies plastic and metal corner guards. There are to be no

such corner guards noted in the plans. Will you please clarify if

the corner guards identified in Spec 102600 are to be included

in the bid?

These items should be included in the bid.

Clarification of the exact location of corner

guards will be given in Addendum 5.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.7 E5.1, S3.2

The concrete light pole bases are noted on both E5.1 & S3.2.

Each shows conflicting information by stating differing light

pole base sizes for the same base. Will you please confirm

which detail you would like to use and have included in the bid?

Where there is conflict details on S3.2 shall

prevail.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.8 GD02

Grading Plan has KN 23 referencing light bollard, see Electrical.

No light bollards have been identified on Electrical plans

located in the area called out on GD02? Will you please clarify

the inclussion of and location of these light bollards?

KN34 on GD02 should read "STAINLESS STEEL

BOLLARD". See 2/LH2.02

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.9 S1.1P2 is not found on Sheet S1.1. Will you please identify location

of P2 on Sheet S1.1?

This notation is not used DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.10 S1.1

Pier Cap PC3 is not found on Sheet S1.1. Will you please

identify location of Pier Cap PC3 on Sheet S1.1?

Pier cap at grid intersection A-01 (PC3) is

anticipated to be a 3'-0" x 3'-6" cap, 24" thick with

4-#5 each way (T&B with STD hook). Exact design

will be included in Addendum 5

DRL 11/4/2019



11/05/19

BID-RFI-006.115/LH2.02; Sht 5

of 11

Reference is made to Delegated Design and Contractor to

provide analysis and design of the trash enclosure. Is there an

allowance identified for the cost of design that can be used in

the bid for apples to apples bidding concerning design of the

trash enclosure? Will you please provide structural (pier &

footing requirements) and architectural specific details for

trash enclosure?

The Contractor is responsible for design of apron

and gate footings. Gate posts are not to bear on

masonry walls. Gate posts are to be structurally

independent and require their own foundation

elements to be designed by contractor, along with

trash enclosure apron. All elements shall satisfy

Town of Florence requirements. The trash

enclosure itself (including walls and gate) has

already been designed and is in the drawings.

Contractor shall engage professional engineer for

design of apron and gate footings. No allowance

has been identified for the cost of design.

Structural requirements for apron and gate

footings are the contractor's responsibility.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.126/LH2.01; Sht 4

of 11

Please provide manufacturer information for skate stops and

required spacing for the skate stops?

Grinderminders by Grind to a Halt. Install 36" OC DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.132 of 11; 2/LH

2.03

Gate schedule calls out pedestrian gate to be 3' wide. 2/LH

2.03 calls out same gate dimension of 4' wide. Will you please

identify which dimensions should be be used?

Gate "SIDE GATE" shall be 4' wide per 2/LH2.03.

See Delta 5 Sheet A1.1, A9.1 (attached)

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.14GeoTechnical

Report

Per the summary of the geo-tech report dated Feb 7th, 2019 , is

it the contractors responsibility to mitigate any HAZARDOUS

MATERIALS or GEOLOGIC HAZARDS found on site?

Yes. DRL 11/4/2019


Report

Per the soils report are you requiring Permanent Steel Casing

of the drilled piers or just Temporary casing to prevent raveling

or caving?

See Drilled Pier note 7 on S0.1 DRL 11/4/2019


Report

Per the soils report regarding excavatability of site soils and

cobble zones being present and auger rejection, it appears

there are hard dig conditions. Will you please clarify your

definition of HARD DIG.

The architect cannot provide the definition of

"hard dig" as used by the geotechnical engineer.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.17012100-

Allowances

In reference to Part 1.2 B. #2. and 1.3 A. The contractors costs

for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs,

overhead, profit and other expenses must be included in the

base bid and not accounted for in the $500k Allowance. Does

that include taxes, bonding costs and any other costs?

Taxes, bonding costs and other costs related to

items called for by the construction documents

shall not be part of the owner's $500k allowance.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.18012100-

Allowances

Per 1.3A Please clarify if the following is correct: The $500k

Owner allowance for owner approved construction changes

does not include any work explained or inferred anywhere in

the construction documents. It is to be used for anything new,

not shown, or inferred anywhere in the construction

documents. If unforseen conditions arise or changes to the

work within the construction documents arise, these will be

covered through an approved change order and not from the

$500k allowance. Is this correct?

The $500k Owner allowance will cover added

scope of work, valid claims by the contractor and

unforeseen items which arise in connection with

items called for by the drawings and

specifications

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.19 017900-4

With regards to the Contractor providing the specific hours of

training time called out in this spec. section (146 hours), Will

you please provide the count of how many Owners personnel

will be attending these required training classes?

This section is to be removed per Owner DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.20 017900-3

Will you please give the count of how many copies of the

professionally recorded, minimum required, 8hrs each, of the 5

training modules required of the contractor to provide?

This section is to be removed per Owner DRL 11/4/2019



11/05/19

BID-RFI-006.21 074213.13-3

The statement, "deterioration of metals and other materials

beyond normal weathering" is found under section: 1.11 A.

Warranty for components of metal panels systems, for the two

year warranty. To provide an apples to apples scope, will you

please clarify what constitutes "deterioration of metals and

other materials" and will you please define what "normal

weathering" is?

The text in Item 1.11-A-1-b has been replaced with

"Visible rust". See Delta 4 Revision (attached)

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.22

CP0.7 Spray

Applied

Fireproofing &

Steel Primer

On CP0.7 it would lead one to believe that all the columns,

beams (Primary & Secondary) and deck are to receive

fireproofing and all the structural steel would not be primed?

Is this correct? Repeatedly in the drawings it indicates "fire

proofing not shown for clarity" for example; "A7.1/05.09 - Steel

Beam (Fire Proofing not shown for clarity)". Despite these

notes it would appear that fireproofing is shown on many of

the columns and beams and not on others, for example A7.5

has columns with fireproofing and without in similar details on

the page. Will you please clarify what beams, columns, decks

are to recieve fire proofing and which ones will not and require

steel contractor to primer this steel?

Per CP0.7 and CP0.1 ALL structural columns,

beams and deck shall be fireproofed. The

intended meaning of the phrase "FIREPROOFING

NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY" is "THIS ITEM SHALL

RECEIVE FIREPROOFING, BUT FIREPROOFING

HAS NOT BEEN DEPICTED HERE IN ORDER TO

MAKE IT EASY TO SEE THE OTHER

COMPONENTS TO BE CONSTRUCTED." Where

fireproofing is required, primer is not required.

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.23 LH-1.01

On Sheet LH-1.01 it would appear that the Stainless Steel

Bollard was possibly intended to be Note 33. Will you please

clarify the locations / qty of Stainless Steel Bollards on the

project?

On sheet LH-1.01 KN 33 shall refer to "STAINLESS

STEEL BOLLARD - SEE DETAIL 2 / LH2.02"

Quantity of Stainless steel bollards is two (2).

DRL 11/4/2019

BID-RFI-006.24IFB /

Addendum 1

The deadline to submit RFI's has been stated as October 31,

2019 in th IFB. Addendum 1 provided a response to some of

earlier RFI's submitted but not all of them. Has an extension of

the final RFI deadline been considered to allow for time to

address any questions that may arrise from the current RFI

responses that have not been answered to date?

No. DRL 11/4/2019

© D

LR

Gro

up

Revisions

11

/5/2

019

4:2

2:3

3 P

M

C:\R

evit\3

0-1

91

01

-00_

AR

_P

ina

l_C

o_

Atto

rneys_2

01

8_

dly

on

5A

KX

F.r

vt

30-19101-00

09.06.19

PIN

AL

CO

UN

TY

AT

TO

RN

EY

'S O

FF

ICE


CODE ANALYSISAND PROJECTINFORMATION

CP0.2

971 E

AS

T J

AS

ON

LO

PE

Z C

IRC

LE

-B

UIL

DIN

G "

F"

FLO

RE

NC

E, A

RIZ

ON

A 8

5132

LIFE SAFETY

1. GENERAL NOTES

A. ALL WORK TO CONFORM TO THE GOVERNING JURISDICTION AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. APPLICABLE CODES SHALL ALWAYS TAKE PRECEDENCE.

B. NOTES APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS.

2. CODES

A. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE REGIONAL, STATE AND NATIONAL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION - REFER TO SECTION 2 "APPLICABLE CODES" ON SHEET CP0.1 - CODE ANALYSIS AND PROJECT FORMATION.

B. LIFE SAFETY PATH OF EGRESS FROM FLOOR LEVELS TO EXTERIOR IS INDICATED ON SHEETS CP1.1 THRU CP1.5.

C. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN, SHEET AS1.2, FOR ACCESSIBILITY COMPLIANCE.

D. ACCESSIBILITY COMPLIANCE DETAILS SHALL BE APPLIED WHEREVER APPLICABLE, WHETHER OR NOT REFERENCED ON THE PLANS.

E. FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS SHALL LIST SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTATION PER CURRENT NFPA 72 AND IS A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL.

F. SPRINKLER SYSTEM PLANS SHALL BE SUBMITTED PER CURRENT 2010 NFPA 13 REQUIREMENTS AND IS A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL.

3. FIRE PROTECTION

A. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM:THE SYSTEM INDICATED IN THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. IT SHALL NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION. INSTALLING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE CODE COMPLIANT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM.

SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DRAWINGS SHALL BE ENGINEERED, STAMPED AND/OR SIGNED BY A LICENSED SPECIALTY CONTRACTOR.

B. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM:THE SYSTEM INDICATED IN THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. IT SHALL NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.

SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DRAWINGS SHALL BE ENGINEERED, STAMPED AND/OR SIGNED BY A LICENSED SPECIALTY CONTRACTOR.

C. THE FIRE SPRINKLER / FIRE HYDRANT UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEM INDICATED IN THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED 'FOR REFERENCE ONLY'. IT SHALL NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.

FIRE SPRINKLER/ FIRE HYDRANT UNDERGROUND PIPING SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DRAWINGS SHALL BE ENGINEERED, STAMPED AND/OR SIGNED BY A LICENSED GENERAL CONTRACTOR, OR C-16, C-34 OR C-36 SPECIALTY CONTRACTOR.

D. FIRE HYDRANT AND WATER MAINS:ALL FIRE HYDRANTS MUST BE INSTALLED, TESTED, FLUSHED, PAINTED, AND PLACED INTO SERVICE PRIOR TO ANY COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS BEING BROUGHT ONTO THE PROJECT SITE.

E. FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION:FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION MUST BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH IFC, CHAPTER 14, 33 AND 35.

F. COMPLETE FIRE ACCESS TO BE IN PLACE AND OPERATIONAL PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION AND THROUGHOUT ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION DURATION.

G. FIRE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INTERIM EXITING AND FIRE PROTECTION IN THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. INTERIM EXITING AND FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION.

H. NO PORTION OF THIS FACILITY TO BE OCCUPIED PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION AND VERIFICATION OF THE FACILITY BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION.

4. PENETRATION OF RATED ASSEMBLIES

A. MECHANICAL DUCTS, ETC. PENETRATING FIRE-RATED CEILINGS AND FIRE WALLS SHALL BE CORRESPONDINGLY RATED OR DAMPERED. CABINETS, ELECTRICAL PANELS, LIGHTS, ETC. RECESSED INTO FIRE-RATED WALLS OR CEILINGS SHALL BE BACKED WITH CORRESPONDING FIRE-RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE INTEGRITY OF THE FIRE PROTECTION.

B. FIRE RESISTIVE ASSEMBLIES FOR PROTECTION OF OPENINGS SHALL COMPLY WITH CODE OF JURISDICTION AND THE OFFICE OF STATE FIRE MARSHAL.

C. PENETRATION OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WHICH REQUIRE OPENING PROTECTION SHALL BE FIRE STOPPED. FIRE STOPPING SHALL BE IDENTICAL TO AN APPROVED UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) LISTED ASSEMBLY. PENETRATIONS MUST ALSO CONSIST OF APPROVED MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-WALL PENETRATIONS.

5. ELECTRICAL BACKBOARDS

REFER TO ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE/ DATA DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF FIRE RESISTANCE RATED PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS REQUIRED IN ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION ROOMS. THESE REQUIRED PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS MAY NOT HAVE BEEN SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, BUT MUST BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS PART OF THE OVERALL CONTRACT. BACKBOARDS SHALL BE PAINTED WHITE. DO NOT PAINT STAMPS. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

6. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

ALL CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS SHALL USE THE SYMBOLS IDENTIFIED IN NFPA 170, STANDARD FOR FIRE SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYMBOLS AS SHOWN IN IFC SECTION 907.1.2 (14)

DEFERRED SUBMITTAL APPROVAL RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

NOTE:

ALL DEFERRED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHOWN IN DOCUMENTS ARE SCHEMATIC AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE DESIGN SUBMITTALS WITH JUSTIFICATION OF LIFE SAFETY ELEMENTS AND/OR SYSTEM

APPROVAL FOR ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN LISTED BELOW IS DEFERRED UNDER THE PROVISIONS OF IBC 107.3.4.1

EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM (INCLUDING; GENSET, XFER, TANK MFR., BATTERY CHARGER, FUEL LINE DETAILS, SIZE AND LOCATION, FUEL TYPE AND SIGNAGE)

LIGHT GAUGE STEEL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

R:R

EG

IST

ER

ED

S

PE

CIA

LTY

EN

GIN

EE

R M

US

T

ST

AM

P A

ND

WE

T-S

IGN

DR

AW

ING

S A

ND

S

UP

PO

RT

ING

CA

LCU

LAT

ION

S.

GE

NE

RA

L C

ON

TR

AC

TO

R:A

FF

IX S

HO

P

DR

AW

ING

S S

TA

MP

IND

ICA

TIN

G

CO

OR

DIN

AT

ION

BE

TW

EE

N T

HE

D

EF

ER

RE

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L A

ND

A

PP

RO

VE

D D

RA

WIN

GS

IS C

OM

PLE

TE

.

AR

CH

ITE

CT

AN

D/O

R E

NG

INE

ER

OF

R

EC

OR

D:A

FF

IX S

HO

P D

RA

WIN

G

ST

AM

P IN

DIC

AT

ING

SU

BM

ITT

AL

HA

S

BE

EN

RE

VIE

WE

D A

ND

FO

UN

D T

O B

E IN

G

EN

ER

AL

CO

NF

OR

MA

NC

E T

O T

HE

D

ES

IGN

.

OF

FIC

E O

F T

HE

ST

AT

E F

IRE

MA

RS

HA

L(F

IRE

LIF

E S

AF

ET

Y)

COMPLETE THIS PORTION OF THE MATRIX DURING

THE SUBMITTAL'S REVIEW PROCESS. ALL

THREE COLUMNS MUST BE CHECKED BEFORE

AGENCY SUBMITTAL.

PIN

AL

CO

UN

TY

PLA

N R

EV

IEW

(FO

R U

SE

BY

INS

PE

CT

OR

ON

LY:)

RE

VIE

W P

RO

CE

SS

CO

MP

LET

E

X

PLUMBING FIXTURE CALCULATIONS

EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE

EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE IS REQUIRED PER IBC 915.1

PREFABRICATED METAL STAIRS AND HANDRAILS XX X X

FIRE SPRINKLERS INCLUDING STAND PIPE SYSTEM X

X X X X

X X X

X X X

XX X X X

X

X

MINIMUM NUMBER OF REQUIRED PLUMBING FIXTURES PER IBC 2012TABLE 2902.1

TYPE OF OCCUPANCY

ASSEMBLY (A-3)

WATER CLOSETS

BUSINESS (B)

MALE

1 PER125

FEMALE

LAVATORIES

1 PER65

1 PER 200

DRINKING FOUNTAINS

1 PER 500

SERVICE SINK

1

1 PER 25: 1ST 501 PER 50: EXC. 50

1 PER 40: 1ST 801 PER 80: EXC. 80

1 PER 100 1

METAL FENCES AND GATES XX X X

ELEVATORS XX X X

EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGESTORAGE (S-2) 1 PER 100 1 PER 1001 PER 1000 1

PER IBC 2902.1.1 Fixture calculations. To determine the occupant load of each sex, the total occupant load shall be divided in half. To determine the required number of fixtures, the fixture ratio or ratios for each fixture type shall be applied to the occupant load of each sex in accordance with Table 2902.1. Fractional numbers resulting from applying the fixture ratios of Table 2902.1 shall be rounded up to the next whole number. For calculations involving multiple occupancies, such fractional numbers for each occupancy shall first be summed and then rounded up to the next whole number.

BUILDING OCCUPANT LOAD TABLE FOR PLUMBING FIXTURE CALCULATIONS PER 2012 IBC TABLE 1004.1.2

LEVEL

AREA (SF) PER OCCUPANCY TYPE

A B

PERSONS PER OCCUPANCY TYPE (ROUNDED)

TOTAL OCCUPANTS

98

A B

MALE

S-2 A

FIRST 0 7,627 0 47

116SECOND 0 9,447 0 58

118THIRD 0 9,435 0 59

118FOURTH 0 9,531 0 59

214FIFTH 1,783 61 46

NOTES:

66461 269

B S-2

FEMALE

2

0

0

0

0

2

S-2

1,096

0

0

0

07,732

0 47

0 58

0 59

0 59

61 46

61 269

2

0

0

0

0

2

LEVEL

WATER CLOSETS

A B

MALE

S-2

DECIMAL TOTAL

FIRST 0/125 = 0 47/25 = 1.88

SECOND

THIRD

FOURTH

FIFTH

REQUIRED WATER

CLOSETS

2/100 = .02 1.9 2

MINIMUM NUMBER OF REQUIRED PLUMBING FIXTURES PER IBC 2012 TABLE 2902.1* URINAL SUBSTITUTIONS PER IPC 419.2

WATER CLOSETS PROVIDED

2

50/25+8/50 = 2.16 2.16 3 2

2.18 3 2

2.18 3 2

2.328 3 2

0/100 = 0

50/25+9/50 = 2.18

50/25+9/50 = 2.18

61/125 = .488 46/25 = 1.84

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

URINALS PROVIDED*

1

1

1

1

1

LEVEL

WATER CLOSETS

A B

FEMALE

S-2

DECIMAL TOTAL

FIRST

SECOND

THIRD

FOURTH

FIFTH

REQUIRED WATER

CLOSETS

2/100 = .02 1.9 2

WATER CLOSETS PROVIDED

3+ 1 UNISEX

2.16 3

2.18 3

2.18 3

2.778 3

0/100 = 0

61/65 = .938 46/25 = 1.84

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

LEVEL

LAVATORIES

A B

MALE

S-2

DECIMAL TOTAL

FIRST 0/200 = 0 47/40 = 1.175

SECOND

THIRD

FOURTH

REQUIRED LAVATORIES

2/100 = .02 1.195 2

LAVATORIES PROVIDED

2

FIFTH

58/40 = 1.45 0/100 = 0 1.45 2 2

59/40 = 1.475 1.475 2 2

1.475 2 2

61/200 = .305 46/40 = 1.15 1.455 2 2

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

59/40 = 1.475

LEVEL

LAVATORIES

A B

FEMALE

S-2

DECIMAL TOTAL

FIRST

SECOND

THIRD

FOURTH

2/100 = .02 1.195 2 2 + 2 UNISEX

FIFTH

0/100 = 0 2

2

2

46/40 = 1.15 1.455 2

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

0/100 = 0

REQUIRED LAVATORIES

LAVATORIES PROVIDED

LEVEL

DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A B S-2

DECIMAL TOTAL

FIRST 0/500 = 0 94/100 = .94

SECOND

THIRD

FOURTH

REQUIRED DRINKING

FOUNTAINS

4/1000 = .004 .944 1

DRINKING FOUNTAINS PROVIDED

2

FIFTH

0/500 = 0 116/100 = 1.16 0/1000 = 0 1.16 2 2

118/100 = 1.18 1.18 2 2

1.18 2 2

122/500 = .244 92/100 = .92 1.164 2 2

0/500 = 0

0/500 = 0 118/100 = 1.18

0/1000 = 0

0/1000 = 0

0/1000 = 0

LEVEL

SERVICE SINKS

FIRST

SECOND

THIRD

FOURTH

REQUIRED SERVICE

SINKS

1

SERVICESINKS

PROVIDED

FIFTH

1

1 1

1 1

1 1

1 1

3+ 2 UNISEX

3+ 2 UNISEX

3+ 2 UNISEX

3+ 2 UNISEX

2 + 2 UNISEX

2 + 2 UNISEX

2 + 2 UNISEX

2 + 2 UNISEX

0/125 = 0

0/125 = 0

0/125 = 0

0/65 = 0

0/65 = 0

0/65 = 0

0/65 = 0

47/25 = 1.88

50/25+8/50 = 2.16

50/25+9/50 = 2.18

50/25+9/50 = 2.18

0/200 = 0

0/200 = 0

0/200 = 0

0/200 = 0

0/200 = 0

0/200 = 0

0/200 = 0

61/200 = .305

47/40 = 1.175

58/40 = 1.45 1.45

59/40 = 1.475 1.475

1.47559/40 = 1.475

FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS XX X X X

1

1 09/06/19 REVIEW COMMENTS


5


OUTSTANDING ITEMS

11/05/19



1 221120Spec section is not complete Revised section 221120 wil be included in

Addendum 5

DRL 11/5/2019

2 A13.1-A13.5Corner guards not indicated on plans Location of corner guards will be indicated in

Addendum 5

DRL 11/5/2019

3 S1.1Pier cap at Grid A-01 is undesignated Pier cap at grid A-01 (PC3) design to be released in

Addendum 5

DRL 11/5/2019

4 280000Spec division 28 is missing Spec division 28 is pending Pinal County IT

revisions

DRL 11/5/2019


SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER CLARIFICATIONS



1

003132

Paragraph

1.1.A

Is it the intent to say that the Geotech report is not part of

the contract documents, especially if specifically referenced

in the drawings?

JM/MA Yes. DRL 11/5/2019

2

011000

Paragraph

1.6.A

The team should check to make sure that this paragraph

does not conflict with the IFB

JM/MA Revised to say "Refer to IFB document, page 26,

item 2". See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

3

012976

Paragraph

3.1.A

There is no specific AIA document referenced in this

Paragraph. Also, is it the intent that the Contractor submit

lien waivers each month?

JM/MA Revised to say "Submit pay application and lien

wavers..." See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

4014500

Paragraph 1.6.C

A Town of Buckeye reference is included JM/MA Revised to say "Town of Florence". See Delta 5

revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

5014500

Paragraph 2.1

Tests appear to be included in more than just the sections

listed. Should this paragraph be removed?

JM/MA Revised to say "Tests are specified in (but not

limited to) the following Sections:" See Delta 5

revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

6015000

Paragraph 1.3.C

– Is it the intent that the Owner pay for water costs for all of

the listed applications?

JM/MA Yes. DRL 11/5/2019

7

015000

Paragraph

1.10.A

– It’s our understanding that the existing building may be

used for office space for the Owner and Architect. Does the

Contractor still need to supply all of the items listed?

JM/MA Archie has confirmed this. Revised to say

"Temporary office space for use by the Contractor,

Owner and Architect will be provided by Owner in

existing facilities." See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

8

015723

Paragraph

1.3.A

We have not been able to locate the SWPPP. Is it available

to include in the bid set?

JM/MA Civil drawings state the SWPP is the contractor's

responsibility. They are to submit all required

documents. See sheet UT01 general note 15

DRL 11/5/2019

9017700

Paragraph 1.4.C

For the flush to be completed, does all owner-supplied FF&E

need to first be installed? We’ve experienced this on a past

project, which led to scheduling complications.

JM/MA The final flush of HVAC system does NOT need all

FF&E installed.

DRL 11/5/2019

10

017839

Paragraph

1.3.D

Is the question mark intended to be included? JM/MA Revised to be a period. See Delta 5 revision

(attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

11

033000

Paragraph

3.18.B.2

– I believe this paragraph should be clarified to be by Owner JM/MA Revised to say "Testing agency shall immediately

report to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete

manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with

Contract Documents". See Delta 5 revision

(attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

12

051200

Paragraph

1.8.A

If the Contractor elects for the second of the three options

listed, do they contract for and pay for the Special

Inspection themselves?

JM/MA Revised to say "Special Inspection shall be

conducted at contractor’s expense..." See Delta 5

revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

13

071416

Paragraph

3.5.G.3

– I believe this paragraph should be removed or clarified JM/MA Deleted. See Delta 5 revision (attached) DRL 11/5/2019

14

078413

Paragraph

3.5.A and

078443

Paragraph

3.5.A

Suggest confirming that this is part of Western Tech’s scope JM/MA Noted. DRL 11/5/2019


SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER CLARIFICATIONS

15

081113

Paragraph

3.5.A, 083113

Paragraph

3.3.A,

083513.23

Paragraph

3.3.A, 084113

Paragraph

3.4.A, 084313

Paragraph

3.5.A, 084413

Paragraph

3.6.A, and

087113

Paragraph

3.3.A

– Is this part of the Owner’s testing and inspection scope, or

part of the Contractor’s scope?

JM/MA Text for these sections has been reivsed to include

this language: "Contractor shall engage a qualified

inspector…" See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

16 133123

– Is there a standard format in which the bidder needs to

include all items listed as being required to submit with their

bid?

JM/MA No. DRL 11/5/2019

17 221120

– the specs contain options in brackets and do not appear

to be completed

JM/MA This item will be addressed in Addendum #5.

Contractor to provide allowance for items in this

section.

DRL 11/5/2019

18232114

Paragraph 1.3

Do the bidders need to include this letter with their bid? JM/MA Yes. DRL 11/5/2019

19

232114

Paragraph

3.7.A

– Is this testing to be by Owner? JM/MA No. Contractor's responsibility DRL 11/5/2019

20

270000

Paragraphs

1.1.A and 1.9.B

The commissioning agent is listed here to be under Owner,

but the other sections list the CxA under the contractor.

Please clarify responsibility.

JM/MA Revised to say "The Contractor shall plan for time

for coordination with commissioning agent". See

Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

21

311000

Paragraph

1.7.D

Bluestake phone number appears to be incorrect. I’d

suggest not listing a phone number at all.

JM/MA Deleted phone number. See Delta 5 revision

(attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

22

321216

Paragraph

1.4.D

A Town of Fountain Hills reference has been added JM/MA Revised to say "Town of Florence". See Delta 5

revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

23

321216

Paragraph

3.7.A

– It should be clarified that this testing is by Owner and not

by Contractor

JM/MA Revised to say "Owner will engage a qualified

testing agency ". See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

24321243

Paragraph 1.5.F

Are the LEED requirements listed intended to be included? JM/MA LEED Submittal section has been struck through. It

is not needed. See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

25 321243

I couldn’t find a requirement for the manufacturer to visit the

site during construction. Is there any intent that the

manufacturer should visit the site in support of approval of

the system?

JM/MA No DRL 11/5/2019

26329200 and

329300

Confirm that all soils testing (ie: topsoil analysis) as it

applies to landscaping is by the Contractor

JM/MA Confirmed DRL 11/5/2019

27 LH-1.02

Flag pole lighting is unclear Keynote 30 on Sheet LH-1.02 indicates postion of

the flagpole. The small circles to the north and

south indicate the intended position of the two (2)

flagpole lights.

DRL 11/5/2019

28211313 Timeframe needed for flow test Added test "within 30 days of notice to proceed".

See Delta 5 revision (attached)

DRL 11/5/2019

ADDENDUM NO. ADD-1 Page 1 PINAL COUNTY ......1. DLR Group Project Number: 30-19101-00 2. Project...

Documents

Transcript of ADDENDUM NO. ADD-1 Page 1 PINAL COUNTY ......1. DLR Group Project Number: 30-19101-00 2. Project...